This is only a preview of the September 1995 issue of Silicon Chip. You can view 34 of the 104 pages in the full issue, including the advertisments. For full access, purchase the issue for $10.00 or subscribe for access to the latest issues. Articles in this series:
Articles in this series:
Articles in this series:
Items relevant to "Notes On The Train Detector For Model Railways":
Items relevant to "Build A Jacob's Ladder Display":
Articles in this series:
|
September 1995 1
GETTING INTO
CAR MODS?
GET INTO
THIS BOOK!
From the pages of Australia’s most
dynamic electronics magazine, Silicon
Chip, come 20 electronic projects you
can build for your car. Not just circuits,
but complete articles with complete
instructions, including fitting. Even the
novice constructor can do it!
YES! Twenty great projects for cars, including:
✦ High Energy & Breakerless Ignition Systems ✦ Ultrasonic Alarm
✦ Digital Tachometer ✦ Coolant Level Alarm ✦ Flashing Alarm Light
✦ Talking Headlight Reminder ✦ UHF Remote Switch ✦ Thermostatic
Switch For Electrically Operated Radiator Fans ✦ And much more!
✦ Bonus: there are eight quick circuit ideas too.
All this for
only $895
ORDER
FROM:
(+$3 p&p)
Yes! Please send me ____ copies of 20 Electronic Projects For Cars
Enclosed is my cheque/money order for $________ or please debit my
❏ Bankcard ❏ Visa Card ❏ Master Card
Card No.
Signature_____________________________ Card expiry date_____/_____
Name ___________________________Phone No (____)_____________
PLEASE PRINT
Street _____________________________________________________
Suburb/town _______________________________ Postcode___________
2 Silicon Chip
Order today:
phone, fax or
mail . . .
Simply phone (02) 9979
5644 & quote your credit
card number; or fill in the
coupon & fax it to (02) 9979
6503 (any time); or mail
the coupon to Silicon Chip
Publications, PO Box 139,
Collaroy, NSW 2097.
Vol.8, No.9; September 1995
Contents
FEATURES
4 Automotive Ignition Timing; Pt.1
Firing the spark at the correct instant is critical for optimum
engine performance. Here’s a rundown on the basics of ignition
timing – by Julian Edgar
8 Review: Philips Brilliance 21A Autoscan
Computer Monitor
KEYPAD COMBINATION LOCK – PAGE 16
This new monitor from Philips features digital convergence
control and has “Cyberscreen” technology to compensate for
external magnetic fields – by Bob Flynn
PROJECTS TO BUILD
16 Build A Keypad Combination Lock
This unit is based on a dedicated IC and accepts codes up to 12 digits
long. Use it to activate alarms or door strikes – by Jeff Monegal
22 The Incredible Vader Voice
Disguise your voice to sound like Darth Vader or some other being from
a far-off galaxy – by John Clarke
40 Railpower MkII: A Walk-Around Throttle
For Model Railways; Pt.1
It’s based on a microprocessor and includes pulse power, pushbutton
control, inertia, metering and overload protection – by Rick Walters
62 Notes On The Train Detector For Model Railways
Using the detector without block switching – by Leo Simpson
68 Build A Jacob’s Ladder Display
Watch as the spark seemingly defies gravity and climbs the “ladder”
– by John Clarke
74 Audio Lab: A PC-Controlled Audio Test
Instrument; Pt.2
Constructional details plus the calibration procedure – by Roger Kent
RAILPOWER MK.2 WALK-AROUND
THROTTLE FOR MODEL RAILWAYS
– PAGE 40
SPECIAL COLUMNS
34 Serviceman’s Log
What’s happened to service backup? – by the TV Serviceman
57 Computer Bits
Running MemMaker and avoiding memory conflicts – by Greg Swain
84 Vintage Radio
An interesting grid bias problem – by John Hill
DEPARTMENTS
2 Publisher’s Letter
11 Mailbag
32 Circuit Notebook
67 Order Form
88 Bookshelf
92 Product Showcase
98 Ask Silicon Chip
102 Market Centre
104 Advertising Index
100 Notes And Errata
RUNNING MEMMAKER AND AVOIDING
MEMORY CONFLICTS – PAGE 57
September 1995 1
Publisher & Editor-in-Chief
Leo Simpson, B.Bus.
Editor
Greg Swain, B.Sc.(Hons.)
Technical Staff
John Clarke, B.E.(Elec.)
Robert Flynn
Rick Walters
Reader Services
Ann Jenkinson
Advertising Enquiries
Leo Simpson
Phone (02) 9979 5644
Regular Contributors
Brendan Akhurst
Garry Cratt, VK2YBX
Marque Crozman, VK2ZLZ
Julian Edgar, Dip.T.(Sec.), B.Ed
John Hill
Jim Lawler, MTETIA
Philip Watson, MIREE, VK2ZPW
Jim Yalden, VK2YGY
Bob Young
Photography
Stuart Bryce
SILICON CHIP is published 12 times
a year by Silicon Chip Publications
Pty Ltd. A.C.N. 003 205 490. All
material copyright ©. No part of
this publication may be reproduced
without the written consent of the
publisher.
Printing: Macquarie Print, Dubbo,
NSW.
Distribution: Network Distribution
Company.
Subscription rates: $49 per year
in Australia. For overseas rates, see
the subscription page in this issue.
Editorial & advertising offices:
Unit 34, 1-3 Jubilee Avenue, Warrie
wood, NSW 2102. Postal address:
PO Box 139, Collaroy Beach, NSW
2097. Phone (02) 9979 5644. Fax
(02) 9979 6503.
PUBLISHER'S LETTER
Ignorance & hysteria
often carry the day
Anyone who follows the news and
people’s reactions must often wonder
whether Australians really are as keen
on new technology as we are made out
to be. Often, the reaction is one of fear
and loathing, or more precisely, hysteria
and ignorance.
These comments have been prompted
by the recent action by parents with children at a preschool centre in Harbord, a
Sydney beach-side suburb. The parents are reacting against the installation
of a cellular phone transmitter tower some 50 metres away from the centre.
Predictably, all the local politicians have jumped on the bandwagon and are
saying how bad all the “unknown” health risks are and so it goes on. In the
middle of all this, Telstra is in a no-win situation. It has legally installed the
transmitter site and complied with all the regulations.
Now really, it is about time that such whingeing wimps ceased to get any
publicity for their irrational fears and statements. And as for the pollies, they
are being hypocritical as usual. You can bet that all politicians and council
officials who have made supporting noises for this band of parents will have
mobile phones and use them constantly. By doing so, they are subjecting
themselves and all around them to much higher RF fields than would be
present in the preschool yard. Do they really think there is a risk? I’ll bet
they have never thought about it at all.
Furthermore, you can bet that some or most of the parents who are so
concerned about their little darlings’ health risks will have mobile phones
as well. Do they refuse to use them in their car when their little darlings are
strapped into the back seat? I think not. I’ll bet they use them while driving
too, a more immediate risk to health. If any of these people really has a concern
about the health risks of mobile phones, why do they continue to use them?
The truth of the matter is that no-one likes these cellular phone transmitters
because they are ugly. Telstra and the other mobile phone operators would
be wise to do some design work to disguise them but apparently that has not
occurred to them yet. So in the meantime, we get people whingeing about
the health risks. It has to stop. If they honestly thought about the health
risks, they would realise that their children are exposed to a far greater risk
from running around in the Sun than from any exposure to a cellular phone
transmitter. But I doubt that honest thought comes into the process at all.
What we are dealing with is ignorance and hysteria and sadly, they often
carry the day.
Leo Simpson
ISSN 1030-2662
WARNING!
SILICON CHIP magazine regularly describes projects which employ a mains power supply or produce high voltage. All such projects should
be considered dangerous or even lethal if not used safely. Readers are warned that high voltage wiring should be carried out according to the
instructions in the articles. When working on these projects use extreme care to ensure that you do not accidentally come into contact with
mains AC voltages or high voltage DC. If you are not confident about working with projects employing mains voltages or other high voltages,
you are advised not to attempt work on them. Silicon Chip Publications Pty Ltd disclaims any liability for damages should anyone be killed
or injured while working on a project or circuit described in any issue of SILICON CHIP magazine. Devices or circuits described in SILICON
CHIP may be covered by patents. SILICON CHIP disclaims any liability for the infringement of such patents by the manufacturing or selling of
any such equipment. SILICON CHIP also disclaims any liability for projects which are used in such a way as to infringe relevant government
regulations and by-laws.
Advertisers are warned that they are responsible for the content of all advertisements and that they must conform to the Trade Practices Act
1974 or as subsequently amended and to any governmental regulations which are applicable.
2 Silicon Chip
HEWLETT PACKARD
334A Distortion
Analyser
HEWLETT PACKARD
200CD Audio Oscillator
• measures distortion 5Hz600kHz
• harmonics up to 3MHz
• auto nulling mode
• high pass filter
• high impedance AM
detector
HEWLETT PACKARD
HEWLETT PACKARD
3400A RMS Voltmeter 5328A Universal Counter
• voltage
range 1mV
to 300V
full scale
12 ranges
• dB range
-72dBm to
+52dBm
• frequency range 10Hz to
10MHz
• responds to rms value of
input signal
• 5Hz to 600kHz
• 5 ranges
• 10V out
• balanced output
HEWLETT PACKARD
5340A Microwave
Counter
• allows frequency
measurements to
500MHz
• HPIB interface
• 100ns time interval
• T.I. averaging to 10 ps
resolution
• channel C <at> 50ohms
• single input 10Hz - 18GHz
• automatic amplitude
discrimination
• high sensitivity -35dBm
• high AM & FM tolerance
• exceptional reliability
$1050
$79
$475
$695
$1950
BALLANTINE
6310A Test Oscillator
BALLANTINE
3440A Millivoltmeter
AWA F240 Distortion & Noise Meter ...................... $425
AWA G231 Low Distortion Oscillator ...................... $595
EATON 2075 Noise Gain Analyser ...................$6500(ex)
EUROCARD 6 Slot Frames ........................................ $40
GR 1381 Random Noise Generator ........................ $295
HP 180/HP1810 Sampl CRO to 1GHz ................... $1350
HP 400EL AC Voltmeter .......................................... $195
HP 432A Power Meter C/W Head & Cable .............. $825
HP 652A Test Oscillator .......................................... $375
HP 1222A Oscilloscope DC-15MHz ........................ $410
HP 3406A Broadband Sampling
Voltmeter ................................................................ $575
HP 5245L/5253/5255 Elect Counter ....................... $550
HP 5300/5302A Univ Counter to 50MHz ................ $195
HP 5326B Universal Timer/Counter/DVM ............... $295
HP 8005A Pulse Generator 20MHz 3 Channel ........ $350
HP 8405A Vector Voltmeter (with cal. cert.) ......... $1100
HP 8690B/8698/8699 400KHz-4GHz
Sweep Osc ............................................................ $2450
MARCONI TF2300A FM/AM Mod Meter
500kHz-1000MHz ................................................... $450
MARCONI TF2500 AF Power/Volt Meter ................. $180
SD 6054B Microwave Freq Counter
20Hz-18GHz ......................................................... $2500
SD 6054C Microwave Freq Counter
1-18GHz ............................................................... $2000
TEKTRONIX 465 Scope DC-100MHz .................... $1190
TEKTRONIX 475 Scope DC-200MHz .................... $1550
TEKTRONIX 7904 Scope DC-500MHz .................. $2800
WAVETEK 143 Function Gen 20MHz ...................... $475
FLUKE
8840A Multimeter
RACAL DANA
9500 Universal
Timer/Counter
• true RMS response to 30mV
• frequency coverage 10kHz1.2GHz
• measurement from 100µV
to 300V
• stable measurement
• accuracy ±1% full scale to
150MHz
• list price elsewhere over
$5500
• 2Hz-1MHz frequency range
• digital counter with 5 digit
LED display
• output impedance switch
selectable
• output terminals fuse
protected
$350
$795
HEWLETT PACKARD
1740A Oscilloscope
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS TEST SETS:
IFR500A ............................................................... $8250
IFR1500 .............................................................. $12000
MARCONI 2955A .................................................. $8500
SCHLUMBERGER 4040 ........................................ $7500
TEKTRONIX
475A Oscilloscope
TEKTRONIX
7603 Oscilloscope
(military)
• frequency range to 100MHz
• auto trigger
• A & B input controls
• resolution 0.1Hz to 1MHz
• 9-digit LED display
• IEEE
• high stability timebase
• C channel at 50 ohms
• fully programmable
5½ digit multimeter
• 0 to 1000V DC voltage
• 0.005% basic accuracy
• high reliability/self test
• vacuum fluoro display
• current list $1780
$695
$350
TEKTRONIX
FG504/TM503 40MHz
Function Generator
TEKTRONIX CF/CD
SERIES
CFC250 Frequency Counter: $270
• DC-100MHz bandwidth
• 2-channel display mode
• trigger - main/delay sweep
• coupling AC, DC, LF rej,
HF rej
$990
• 250MHz bandwidth
• 2-channel display mode
• trigger - main/delay sweep
• coupling AC, DC, LF rej, HF rej
• mil spec
AN/USM
281-C
• triggers to
100MHz
• dual trace
• dual timebase
• large screen
$1690
$650
The name that means quality
CFG250 2MHz Function Generator
$375
• 0.001Hz-40MHz
• 3 basic waveforms
• built-in attenuator
• phase lock mode
$1290
CDC250 Universal Counter: $405
NEW EQUIPMENT
Affordable Laboratory Instruments
PS305 Single
Output Supply
SSI-2360 60MHz
Dual Trace Dual
Timebase CRO
• 60MHz dual trace, dual
trigger
• Vertical sens. 1mV/div.
• Maximum sweep rate
5ns/div.
• Built-in component tester
• With delay sweep, single
sweep
• Two high quality probes
$1110 + Tax
Frequency Counter
1000MHz High
Resolution
Microprocessor
Design CN3165
• 8 digit LED display
• Gate time cont.
variable
• At least 7 digits/
second readout
• Uses reciprocal
techniques for low
frequency resolution
$330 + Tax
Function Generator
2/5MHz High Stability
FG1617 & FG 1627
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multiple waveforms
1Hz to 10MHz Counter
Output 20V open
VCF input
Var sweep lin/log
Pulse output TTL/CMOS
FG1617 $340 + Tax
FG1627 $390 + Tax
PS303D Dual
Output Supply
• 0-30V & 0-3A
• Four output meters
• Independent or
Tracking modes
• Low ripple output
$420 + Tax
•
PS305D Dual
Output Supply
0-30V and 0-5A
$470 + Tax
PS303 Single
Output Supply
• 0-30V & 0-3A
• Two output meters
• Constant I/V
$265 + Tax
Audio
Generator
AG2601A
• 10Hz-1MHz 5 bands
• High frequency
stability
• Sine/Square output
$245 + Tax
• 0-30V & 0-5A
$300 + Tax
PS8112 Single
Output Supply
• 0-60V & 0-5A
$490 + Tax
Pattern
Generator
CPG1367A
• Colour pattern to test
PAL system TV circuit
• Dot, cross hatch, vertical,
horizontal, raster, colour
$275 + Tax
MACSERVICE PTY LTD
Australia’s Largest Remarketer of Test & Measurement Equipment
September
20 Fulton Street, Oakleigh Sth, Vic., 3167 Tel: (03) 9562 9500 Fax: (03) 9562
9590 1995 3
**Illustrations are representative only
Pt.1: when to fire the sparkplug
Automotive
Ignition Timing
Firing the spark at the right moment
is critical when it comes to obtaining
good power, emissions and economy
from an engine. Here’s a rundown on
the basics of ignition timing.
By JULIAN EDGAR
The advent of programmable engine management has meant that
people outside major engine manufacturing companies are devising
complete ignition advance angle
maps for the first time. While the old
points-and-weights system may have
been modified from time to time, any
changes made were always based on
the starting point provided by the
car’s manufacturer. However, when
program
mable engine management
systems can have ignition advance
curves of literally any shape programmed into them, a whole new
approach needs to be taken.
This month, we examine the factors which influence ignition timing
and also look at the traditional spark
timing mechanisms. Next month, we
will examine the ignition control provided by fully programmable engine
management systems and look at the
timing maps devised for some specific
engines.
While it is obvious that more air and
fuel is required at higher engine loads,
the same clarity of understanding does
not apply to the ignition timing requirements. However, considering the
number of factors that affect ignition
timing, this isn’t surprising.
The requirement for adjustable
ignition timing is based mainly on
one factor – the finite time taken
for the fuel/air charge to be ignited
and burned. In practice, the period
between the spark firing and the
complete combustion of the fuel/air
mix is very short – about two milliseconds (2ms) on average. However,
while this burn time is small, it is
The timing of the ignition sparks during an engine’s
cycle must be continually adjusted in order to obtain
correct combustion behaviour. This, in turn, is necessary
for achieving peak power and obtaining low exhaust
emissions. Over-advanced ignition timing can cause
knocking (or detonation) in the engine. This can destroy
the electrodes of the spark plugs (see above) and lead to
major engine damage.
4 Silicon Chip
TDC (TOP DEAD CENTRE)
Z
90°
Fig.1: when advanced ignition
timing is used, the spark plug is fired
before the piston reaches top dead
centre (TDC). However, because the
combustion takes a finite time, the
cylinder pressure peaks after the
piston has actually just passed TDC.
(Bosch).
still sufficiently long enough to have
an impact on when the spark should
occur for best performance.
In practice, the ignition must
be timed so that the peak pressure
caused by the explosion occurs just
after the piston has passed top dead
centre (TDC), and so is on its way back
down the cylinder bore. If ignition
occurs too early, then the piston will
be slowed in its upward movement.
Conversely, if it occurs too late, then
the piston will be well down the
cylinder and so the work done on it
will be reduced.
The timing of the ignition is normally expressed in crankshaft degrees before TDC. For example, if the spark is
fired when the crankshaft is 15 degrees
before TDC, then the spark timing is
referred to as “15 degrees advanced”.
The greater the ignition advance angle,
the earlier the spark is fired while the
piston is still heading upwards. Note
that in some situations (for example,
emissions control), it is beneficial to
retard the timing so much that the
spark is actually fired after the piston
has passed TDC.
PRESSURE IN COMBUSTION CHAMBER
BAR
CRANKSHAFT ANGLE
TDC
90°
180°
270°
0°
BDC
360°
40
A
20
Z
10
180°
B
90°
0°
90°
180°
BEFORE TDC
AFTER TDC
ADVANCE ANGLE
Fig.2: combustion chamber pressure
during the compression and power
strokes of the engine. The “A” curve
indicates the combined compression
and combustion pressure, while “B”
shows the compression pressure only.
“Z” is the point of ignition. (Bosch).
BAR
COMBUSTION PRESSURE
PISTON
If the composition of the mixture
was constant (and it isn’t), then the
elapsed time between ignition and
full combustion would remain about
the same at all rpm. As a result, if the
ignition advance angle was set to a
fixed angle before TDC, the combustion process would be shifted further
and further into the combustion stroke
as the engine speed increased. This
is because the piston moves faster at
higher engine speeds and thus would
be further down the bore by the time
combustion actually occurred.
To prevent this from happening, the
ignition advance must be progressively increased as engine speed rises (ie,
the plug must be fired earlier in the
ignition cycle).
The other major factor affecting the
amount of advance required is the
engine load. As cylinder pressures
and the air/fuel ratio decline (ie, the
mixture becomes richer), the speed of
combustion increases, meaning that ignition should be retarded. Conversely,
even more advance than that dictated
solely by the engine speed is needed
at low loads where lean mixtures are
used.
If only it were that simple! Not only
does engine speed and load determine
the best timing for the combustion of
the mixture, but the following factors
are also relevant:
(1). the design and size of the combustion chamber;
(2). the position of the ignition spark(s)
in the chamber;
(3). the fuel type;
(4). the emissions levels required;
(5). the engine coolant temperature; &
(6). the safety margin required before
knocking occurs.
The latter point is of vital importance. Knocking occurs in an engine
when the pressure and temperature
rises very rapidly due to an over-advanced ignition timing (possibly exacerbated by glowing coke deposits in
the cylinder head). Instead of the flame
front propagating at about 34 metres/
second, it moves at about 10 times this
pace, causing a metallic pinging noise
to be emitted from the engine.
The noise is of little importance;
what is a cause for concern is the
damage that this hammer-blow can
do to the internal engine components.
Broken pistons, smashed heads and
shattered sparkplugs can all occur in
a just a few seconds.
This problem must be particularly
50
BEFORE TDC
AFTER TDC
40
2
30
1
20
10
Zb
0
75°
50°
Za
Zc
3
25°
0°
-25°
-50°
IGNITION ADVANCE ANGLE
-75°
Fig.3: if the spark occurs too early
(at Zb), then combustion knock (line
2) will occur. Line 1 shows normal
combustion behaviour, the result of
ignition at Za. A spark fired too late
in the cycle at Zc will result in low
combustion pressure as shown by line
3. (Bosch).
NOX EMISSIONS
SPARKPLUG
20
50° BEFORE TDC
16
40°
12
30°
8
20°
4
0
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
EXCESS AIR FACTOR
1.2
1.3
Fig.4: not only is power output
affected by ignition timing but also
exhaust emissions and fuel economy.
The affect of timing on the emission of
oxides of nitrogen with different air/
fuel ratios is shown here. (Bosch).
guarded against in en
gines using
forced induction (ie, supercharging or
turbocharging). In this type of engine,
September 1995 5
MANUAL LINKAGE
CAM SLOT
CENTRIFUGAL
FORCE
RETARD
ADVANCE
NO ADVANCE
AT IDLE
CENTRIFUGAL
FORCE
CAM ROTATION
CLOCKWISE
FULL ADVANCE AT
HIGH ENGINE SPEED
Fig.5: early vehicles used a fully-manual advance/retard
mechanism, in which the breaker plate was rotated by
the driver by means of a dash-mounted lever. This type of
system could provide good control but only if the driver
was interested!
the burn occurs very quickly and so
knocking can easily occur. To counter this, the ignition advance angle is
retarded during boost periods.
Traditional mechanisms
The first adjustable ignition timing mechanism was a fully-manual advance system. In this system, a dash-mounted (or steering
wheel-mounted) lever was used to
rotate the distributor plate. By moving
Fig.7: the centrifugal timing mechanism increases spark
advance as the engine speed increases. This is achieved by
the action of weights and springs attached to the breaker
shaft. As the engine speed increases the weights swing out,
causing the shaft to shift position.
this lever back and forth, the points
could be made to open earlier or later
in the cycle.
A lever scale allowed the driver to
gauge the degree of adjustment. In
practice, the timing was normally retarded for starting and then advanced
for running. However, although this
approach meant that the timing could
be fully controlled (with a sensitive
driver), its efficiency depended so
much on the individual that it was
BREAKER POINTS
CAM ROTATION
VACUUM
DIAPHRAGM LEVER
BREAKER
PLATE
ROTATION
Fig.6: the mechanical spark timing system used until quite recently combines
both vacuum and centrifugal advance mechanisms. At times of low load, the
manifold vacuum is high and a vacuum diaphragm is used to advance the
spark. Conversely, high engine loads result in low vacuum and a relatively
retarded spark.
6 Silicon Chip
soon abandoned.
The next step saw the introduction
of an ignition timing mechanism
which was to last for the next 80-odd
years. This system took into account
both the engine speed and load using
centrifugal advance and vacuum advance mechanisms.
Centrifugal advance was used to
change the ignition timing on the basis
of the speed of the engine, via a series
of spring-loaded weights attached to
the breaker shaft within the distribu
tor. As the engine speed increases the
weights swing out, causing the shaft
to shift position. In turn, this causes
the points to open sooner.
Conversely, when the engine slows,
the spring-loaded weights retract, allowing the breaker shaft to shift back
in the other direction and thus retard
the spark.
At the same time, the vacuum advance mechanism is used to adjust the
spark timing to suit the engine load.
Vacuum advance takes advantage
of the fact that when the throttle is
only just open, a low pressure (high
vacuum) is created in the manifold
after the throttle butterfly valve. As
the throttle opening increases, the
vacuum decreases (a MAP sensor
in an EFI system makes use of this
parameter to determine engine load).
In vacuum advance ignition timing
mechanisms, one side of a diaphragm
is linked to the distributor plate by
a rod, while the other side is linked
pneumatically (ie, via a hose) to a
source of manifold vacuum. At times
of high vacuum (low load), the distrib-
40°
ADVANCE ANGLE BEFORE TDC
B
30°
A
20°
10°
0°
TORR
MBAR
600
This photo shows the workings of a traditional distributor that used
points and relied on centrifugal and vacuum advance mechanisms.
Fig.8 (right) shows the final timing curve achieved by this type of
system. The full-load advance curve (A) is achieved through the
centrifugal action of the weights, while the partial load advance
curve (B) additionally advances the timing when loads are light
(and vacuum is therefore high). “Road load” means that the engine
is only partially loaded, while “full load” means that the throttle is
wide open. (Bosch).
utor plate is turned so that the spark
is advanced. Con
versely, when the
vacuum drops, the spark is retarded in
response to the increased load.
Although this primitive system
worked well for many years, it did not
take into account many of the factors
required for optimum ignition timing.
Consequently, the safety-margin to
detonation (knocking) was generally
left high, thereby limiting power and
reducing efficiency.
Electronic systems
The use of electronic spark advance
systems revolutionised ignition tim-
VACUUM
400
500
ROAD LOAD
400
300
A2
300
200
200
100
0
A1
100
0
1000
ing. First, the traditional parameters of
engine speed and load are now catered
for by a detailed timing map stored in
an EPROM (electrically programmable
read-only memory). An electronic
timing map is far more accurate than
the timing parameters produced by the
traditional mechanical systems and is
far more reliable. Many modern cars
also now have antiknock sensors and
these allow the engine management
computer to set the ignition timing for
best performance while still maintaining safe operation.
In addition, other factors which
affect optimum timing can now be
IGNITION ADVANCE
LOA
D
FULL LOAD
2000
3000
4000
5000 REV/MIN
taken into consideration. Typically, a
modern computer-controlled engine
management system accepts data from
sensors which monitor engine speed,
manifold vacuum, throttle position,
engine temperature, air temperature
and battery vol
tage, and sets the
ignition timing accordingly. Such
systems also usually provide full fuel
management as well, by controlling
the fuel injectors.
As a result, electronic engine management systems provide improved
starting and idle speed control, better
fuel economy, increased performance
SC
and lower engine emissions.
IGNITION ADVANCE
ED
E SPE
ENGIN
Fig.9: electronic spark advance and engine management
systems allow complex ignition maps which provide
optimal timing for a large range of load and engine speed
conditions. (Bosch).
LOA
D
EED
E SP
ENGIN
Fig.10: the traditional mechanical advance mechanism
produces a map which is far simpler than that achieved
by electronic means. As a result, the ignition timing is far
from optimum in many operating conditions. (Bosch).
September 1995 7
For CAD and desktop publishing
Philips Brilliance 21A
autoscan monitor
Announced by Philips in late 1994, the
Brilliance 21A is a radical new development
in computer monitors. Not only are all its
specifications such as convergence under
digital control but it even compensates for
variations in the Earth’s magnetic field.
By BOB FLYNN
Ever since this new range of monitors was released, they have been in
short supply but after a very long wait,
we finally received a sample unit to
review. It was quite an experience.
We have a number of large screen
monitors in the SILICON CHIP offices
but for sheer size, the Brilliance 21A
monitor puts them in the shade. It’s not
so much that it has a large screen but
its cabinet is quite bulky and heavy.
Its overall dimensions are 528 x 540
x 501mm (W x H x D). So you need a
large desk for one of these monitors
and you need two men to lift it safely
since it weighs 37 kilograms.
The Brilliance 21A has a 54cm,
flat, black matrix, square CRT with
a dot pitch of 0.28mm, currently the
best that can be made. The screen is
anti-reflection and antistatic treated.
Maximum resolution is 1600 x 1280
pixels although that does not tell the
whole story.
While many monitors can be
switched to 1600 x 1280, their resulting picture may not be useable. The
Brilliance 21A, on the other hand, has
been electronically tweaked to obtain
the very best picture that can be obtained from existing 0.28mm dot CRT
technology. In fact, it could be said the
picture quality is theoretically better
than is possible. We’ll see why, later.
As with all large screen monitors,
8 Silicon Chip
the Brilliance is an autoscan model
and will automatically cope with
horizontal scan rates from 30-82kHz
and vertical scan rates from 50-160Hz.
Video input is RGB analog and typical
sensitivity is 0.7V. Video bandwidth
is 150MHz and input impedance 75
ohms. Three modes of sync are accepted: composite sync on the green
line, separate com
posite TTL sync
(positive or negative) and separate TTL
Horizontal and Vertical sync (positive
or negative).
The monitor also has the following
features: (1) digital control of contrast
and brightness over the full screen,
the brightness uniformity being better
than 90%; (2) digital control of convergence so that it is better than 0.2mm
(typically 0.15mm) over the full
screen; and (3) automatic cancelling
of the earth’s magnetic field through
a magnetic sensor and a proprietary
circuit that maintains a constant magnetic field inside the monitor. This
ensures that distortions of the display
caused by changes of the position of
the monitor do not occur.
Power management
Naturally, this monitor has energy
saving features and they are quite
comprehensive. It is TCO 1992 Power
Management/Energy Star Power Management compatible. This requires a
VESA-DPMS compliant signal. With
screen saver programs, the power
consumption drops 10%. With computers with VESA Display Power
Management, the power consumption
drops from a maximum of 180W to
15W, after one hour without vertical
and horizontal sync signals. When
sync signals are restored, recovery to
normal operation takes less than 3 seconds. After a further one hour without
sync signals, the monitor switches to
its lowest power state, consuming a
maximum of 8W. Recovery time from
this state is the same as the normal
switch-on period. The power state in
these reduced modes is shown on the
LCD panel.
Storage in the monitor’s memory of
21 different graphic resolution files, 12
factory preset and nine user generated,
is possible. Software is supplied with
the monitor that allows the user to
adjust the image for the correct size
and centring and generate a correction
table for the control of convergence,
brightness and colour uniformity, if
the application is not covered by the
default files.
Black screen
Apart from the size, the first thing
that most people notice about this
monitor is the “blackness” of the
screen. It certainly has the blackest
screen we have seen. Apart from this
the 21A looks very much like any other
digital monitor. At the bottom centre
of the front is a yellow backlit liquid
crystal display, flanked on either side
by a group of four pushbuttons. Further to the right of these are controls
for brightness and contrast and the
power switch.
The buttons to the left of the display
are Function, Adjust (+), Degauss and
Adjust (-). The + and - buttons each
you need to store your mode
by pushing the channel select
button to select one of the user
file memories (13-21).
Error messages
If no connection can be made
between the monitor and your
computer, the LCD will display
an error message such as “Missing H sync”, “Missing V sync”
or “Missing H & V sync”, meaning that cables are improperly
connected or the computer is
not switched on. The messages
“V out of range” or “H out of
range” mean that the vertical or
horizontal scan frequencies of
your computer are outside the
monitor’s 50-160Hz vertical or
30-82kHz horizontal scan rates.
Five additional error messages
may be displayed to indicate
monitor faults.
Geometry & convergence
For our tests, the Brilliance
21A was connected to a 486DX
and used with programs operatThe model 21A is the top model in the Philips Brilliance range of monitors. It has
ing at various resolutions from
digital control of all picture parameters and automatic compensation for variations
800 x 600 to 1280 x 1024 pixels.
in external magnetic fields.
For the two highest resolutions,
the message “Mode not found”
allow adjustment of the geometry and
internal microprocessor. A two-posi- was displayed and so we went through
colour temperature through a scale of tion slide switch selects either 75-ohm the procedure for creating user gener0-9, indicated on the LCD. The buttons
input impedance or high impedance. ated files. The supplied software runs
to the right of the display are Memory With only one monitor connected to from Windows and involves linking
Select, Memory Store, Memory Recall
your computer this switch should be
selected channels to user tables. This
and Input select.
in the 75-ohm position. The high im- done, Geometry Adjust was carried
Pressing the Function button ac- pedance position should only be used
out. This entails adjusting the raster
cesses the following 10 functions if two monitors are connected to your to screen centre and setting the vertisequ ent iall y: Horizontal position, graphics card.
cal and horizontal borders to a width
Width, Vertical position, Height, ColAt switch-on the LCD panel displays depending on the resolution for which
our temperature, Pincushion, Pincush- the message “Wait...start up”, followed
the table was being made.
ion balance, Trapezoidal, Trapezoidal
by “F/W Release..(No.)”. Each of these
The next step is to Select Reference
balance and Language.
messages display for 1-2 seconds and Points. A green mark has to be moved
The colour temperature function are then followed by the message
to the top left of the screen and a secallows the choice of either a 9300° or
“Test in progress”. This message is ond green mark moved to the bottom
6500° white. A third choice allows displayed for 2-3 seconds while the right of the screen. The program then
the operator to set his own colour
monitor does its self checks. If the creates the correction table for brighttemperature by the adjustment of the
moni
tor recognises the timing sup- ness and convergence of the operating
red, green and blue mixture using the
plied by your video card as one of its
mode. The files so created should be
+ and - pushbuttons.
default modes the LCD will show the
saved to the hard disc so that the chanOn the rear of the monitor is a power
resolution being used. If it does not, nel settings can be restored if required
input socket (the monitor can operate then the message “Mode not found”
at a later date.
from 90-132VAC and 180-264VAC, 47- will be displayed.
Why do all this? Because the Philips
76Hz auto selected) and five BNC sockThis means that the current timing
Brilliance 21A is capable of much
ets for the signal connections. A 15-pin
is not stored though the monitor is better convergence than typical comMini D-Sub socket for video input is
working, with a proper screen display.
puter monitors but it has to be done for
also provided. A socket not normally You can elect to ignore the “Mode each and every screen resolution and
found on monitors is 9-pin Mini D not found” message but if you do
combination of horizontal and vertical
to provide a serial interface between you will not be able to optimise the
sync. With such a large screen and
the computer and the monitor’s own
convergence for your mode. Hence,
fine dot pitch, picture imperfections
September 1995 9
Fig.1: the schematic of the magnetic compensation circuitry in the Philips Brilliance 21A monitor. It continuously
compensates for any variations in external magnetic fields and ensures that optimum picture quality is maintained.
that would go unnoticed on smaller
monitors become critical, particularly
at the higher screen resolutions.
Magnetic field compensation
All of the fine attention to detail
in obtaining the best convergence,
geo
metry and uniformity of screen
brightness are subject to a big hazard
in the larger monitors. Simply rotating
the monitor changes its orientation to
the Earth’s magnetic field and thus the
electronic beams scanning the picture
are thrown off their optimised paths.
This happens in all monitors but again,
the larger the monitor, the worse the
effect on the picture, especially as far
as purity is concerned.
Philips has been really clever
here in introducing their innovative
Cyberscreen Technology, a high fal
utin’ name which embraces all the
21A’s digital control circuitry and,
more particularly, its magnetic field
compensation.
In essence, the 21A monitors the
magnetic fields acting upon the monitor and then produces a compensating magnetic field so that the high
convergence standard is constantly
maintained.
The schematic of Fig.1 shows the
general arrangement. A bridge of Hall
Effect devices is used to monitor the
magnetic fields and produce an offset
voltage. This voltage is converted to
10 Silicon Chip
a square wave by alternating current
pulses fed to the inversion coil. The
output square wave’s amplitude is
proportional to the magnetic field
strength. The square wave is AC coupled to the processing unit to remove
the offset and amplified. The signal
is then applied to the purity coils to
correct the monitor’s convergence – a
classic feedback circuit.
The correction signal is also rectified to produce a DC voltage proportional to the magnetic field. This voltage is applied to the degauss circuit
where any change in level triggers the
degauss circuit. Hence, at any time,
the Brilliance 21A may perform an
automatic degauss which you see as a
momentary picture distortion accompanied by the characteristic audible
twitch from the degauss coils.
The proof of the pudding
While it is easy to be overwhelmed
by the complexity of this monitor and
its operating procedures, the proof is
in the outstanding picture quality.
The monitor was used mainly with a
CAD program at a resolution of 1280
x 1024 pixels and the display showed
excellent geometry, even brightness
and good resolution. With my usual
monitor (a 20-inch colour monitor
with 0.31mm dot pitch), I need to
zoom in frequently on large drawings,
particularly when placing type; circles
that appear round at the centre of the
screen are not so when moved away
from centre. This is not the case with
the 21A. Type placement does not
require the same level of zoom and
circles are circles no matter where
they are placed on the screen. As noted
above, high resolution mode in one
monitor is not the same as on another
and this is where you really notice the
picture quality of the Brilliance 21A –it
is aptly named.
A minor irritation is the delay that
occurs when the resolution changes
within a program. For example, if the
program shells out to DOS, to perform
a print command, then the monitor
takes a noticeable time to find the
correct resolution file and show a correctly scanned picture. This delay is
longer than the switching time of the
relays in a multi-sync monitor.
As well as being ideal for desktop
publishing and CAD pro
grams, the
Brilliance 21A would appear to be
ideally suited to any program where
colour accuracy is paramount such as
in advertising production, textile and
fashion design, and so on.
At the time of writing, the Philips
Brilliance 21A is priced at $5270 plus
tax where applicable. Further information can be obtained from Philips
Business Electronics, Technology
Park, 3 Figtree Drive, Homebush, NSW
2140. Phone 1 800 658 086.
SC
MAILBAG
Two project suggestions
I would like to suggest two ideas for
future projects. The first is a low pow
er, say 5W maximum, general purpose
stereo amplifier. I recently repaired a
cheap 3-in-1 which was suffering from
severe distortion from one channel. It
turned out that the audio chip was (a)
dead and (b) obsolete.
I replaced the chip with the Mini
Stereo Amplifier kit from the Dick
Smith Funway series, as it was the
only small stereo amplifier available.
The LM380s are only good for around
2W flat out (if you don’t mind 10%
distortion!) and can be unstable little
mongrels when they want to be. There
must be a suitable stereo chip lurking
in the data books somewhere that
could be useful as a slightly higher
power general purpose amplifier.
The second is slightly more unusual – a replacement for the spark start
system in a gas stove. I was visiting a
relative recently who is badly affected
by arthritis and found her struggling
with matches to light the gas because
the electric start system in the stove
had given up the ghost.
After whipping the back off the
stove, the spark unit turned out to be
a black box, about the size of an average sized jiffy box, with six wires, for
the six jets and run from the 240VAC
supply. Unfortunately, it was sealed in
epoxy plastic which made repair impossible. This was the second unit that
had failed and she did not want to bear
the expense of another service call,
for it to fail again. The length of the
spark would not have to be too large,
say 5mm, but it should have separate
outputs in case one of the outputs is
shorted to earth accidentally.
M. Allen,
Artarmon, NSW.
Comment: a suitable low cost amplifier
is the LM1875T module featured in the
December 1993 issue. While capable
of 25W it can be derated to deliver 4W
with a 20V supply rail.
The best approach to reliable gas
lighting (particularly with natural
gas) is to dispense with the electronic
spark units altogether and to use a
gas lighter designed for the job. One
such unit, branded “Red Head” is a
modified cigarette lighter with a long
nozzle. They sell quite cheaply, for just
a few dollars.
Disappointment with
speaker review
I am writing to express my disappointment of the quality of the review
of the Jamo classic speakers by Leo
Simpson in the July 1995 issue. It reads
more like a paid advertorial and forum
for personal opinion rather than a clear
unbiased technical and subjective
evaluation of the products.
In particular, I object to his comments on bi-wiring. If Leo or “we”
cannot see the point of bi-wiring I
suggest you read “High Performance
Loudspeakers”, by Martin Colloms
(4th edition). He is considered a world
authority on loudspeaker design
and in his opinion the advantages
of bi-wiring are quite clear, whether
the crossover be at the amplifier end
(preferred) or at the speakers. Briefly,
it reduces currents in conductors that
are common to HF and LF drivers and
reduces the bandwidth each circuit
has to handle. Bi-amping is great but
bi-wiring has definite advantages, albeit small, but isn’t true hifi all about
small gains (pun not intended)?
The Jamo Classic 4’s appear to use
the M-T-M arrangement popular in
designs by Joe D’Apolito who writes
for “Speaker Builder” magazine and
designs systems for major US and
Scandinavian manufacturers. I have
built his excellent Aria 5’s which
are similar to the Jamo 4’s. I feel Leo
missed an opportunity to comment on
the properties of this configuration.
Where are the frequency, phase and
polar response plots, comments on
imaging, comparisons with similarly
priced units, etc?
An earlier speaker review referred to
oxygen-free cable as “a lot of rubbish”
or some such comment. Rightly or
wrongly, many stereophiles use OFC
and I am sure they were insulted by
such statements. As you should know,
sound reproduction is part sci
ence
and part art with many grey areas,
preferences and opinions and to be
dogmatic about any aspect is only
to show ignorance of the subject and
thereby lose one’s credibility.
On a more positive note, I have
read SILICON CHIP since its inception
and commend you on its quality,
broad range of topics and excellent
designs, many of which I have built.
Electronics and audio have been my
profession and hobby since 1948 and
I can relate to the “Serviceman” and
“Vintage Radio” segments. Please keep
up the good work.
R. W. Field,
Bonnie Doon, Vic.
Comment. We note that you have cited
Martin Colloms as a “world authority”
but the fact is that there is no technical
justification for bi-wiring loudspeakers.
The Theory of Super
position clearly
demonstrates that two signals or voltages do not interact in a passive network
but add linearly. Bi-amping is a different
matter but to gain the advantages of reduced intermodulation in the amplifiers
you need to use an electronic crossover
and eliminate the passive network.
We are familiar with the so-called
D’Apolito configuration but we are not
sure that it was intended as a feature
of the Jamo Classic 4’s. It would seem
logical that if the D’Apolito configu
ration is to work properly, the tweeter
should be at or near ear level. With
most small loudspeakers, the D’Apolito arrangement places the tweeter at a
lower than optimum level. As far as we
know, the central placement of a tweeter flanked by the other drivers above
and below was pioneered not by Joe
D’Apolito but by Richard Dunleavey
with his Duntech speakers, designed
and made in Australia.
We do not remember making a
comment on oxygen-free copper cables in a previous review but there is
no justification for using OFC cables
in any audio application. OFC cable
was originally developed by Hitachi as
a solution to hydrogen embrittlement
of conductors inside large alternators
in power stations (alternators use a
pressurised hydrogen atmosphere).
As far as we know, OFC cables were
first advocated by Japanese hifi enthu
siasts who have a well-known taste
for the esoteric. We have not seen one
technical paper on the merits of OFC
SC
cables for hifi use.
September 1995 11
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
dicksmith.com.au
12 Silicon Chip
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
dicksmith.com.au
September 1995 13
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
dicksmith.com.au
14 Silicon Chip
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
dicksmith.com.au
September 1995 15
Build a keypad
combination lock
This keypad combination lock can be used to
arm/disarm a house or car alarm, or to activate
a solenoid-operated door strike. It accepts codes
up to 12 digits long and is easy to program.
Design by JEFF MONEGAL
Keypad combination locks are a
great idea in security applications,
since they are far more convenient to
use than keys. What’s more, the code
can be quickly and easily changed
at the user’s whim to restrict people
who previously had access or just to
maintain security.
By contrast, keys can be easily copied or lost, while locks are expensive
and time-consuming to change.
The Keypad Combination Lock described here can be used in a range of
security applications. These include:
(1) turning burglar alarms on and off;
(2) activating solenoid-operated locking mechanisms in security doors and
16 Silicon Chip
gates; (3) controlling ignition killers
and fuel cutout systems in cars and
boats; and (4) operating power doors
on garages.
When used with a home burglar
alarm, the keypad would typically be
mounted just inside the front door.
Alternatively, the keypad could be
mounted in a weatherproof case just
outside the door. That way, you could
reduce the entry and exit delays to
a bare minimum or simply wire the
alarm for instant triggering.
Main features
Unlike previous circuits, this unit
is based on a dedicated kepad com-
bination lock IC and this has greatly
simplified the circuitry. Called the
UA3730, this 18-pin CMOS device contains all the necessary logic circuitry
to monitor the keypad matrix, plus the
necessary output logic for latched and
momentary operation.
In addition, the chip includes onboard memory which is used to store
the code. Up to 12 numbers can be
stored in memory (for 1012 possible
combinations) but this will depend on
the level of security required. Unlike
previous systems, the code can be
quickly changed (provided you have
access to the PC board), since there
are no wire links to solder in or DIP
switches to set.
In most cases, a simple 4-digit code
will give you adequate security while
retaining the benefits of a number
that’s easy to remember. This number
of digits provides odds of greater than
10,000 to one against someone guessing the correct code. Of course, you
can use more than four digits for even
greater security (although it’s never
D6
1N4004
IN
+12V
C3
1000
D1
IC2
78L05
GND
OUT
C4
10
D3
I
G
R6
1k
A
R8
14 10k B
8
7
5
R3
1k
16
IC1
UA3730
11
10
17
B
E
C
K
R4
1k
B
1
2
3
C2
10
D5
1N4004
SIREN
E
Q2
BD140
C
R4
1k
B
ALARM
ON/OFF
E
18
4
B
O
13
S
MEMORY
SET
LK1
K
A
Q3
BC548
15
6
P
LED2
C
E
PLASTIC
SIDE
C
PIEZO
BUZZER
C5
0.1
9
3x1N4148
D2
KEYPAD
1
1 2 3
2
4 5 6
3
7 8 9
4
* 0 #
5 6 7
E
R7
4.7k
Q1
BD140
C
R1
12k
R5
1k
A
C1
270pF
LOCK
SOLENOID
D4
1N4004
LED1
K
VIEWED FROM BELOW
KEYPAD COMBINATION LOCK
Fig.1: the circuit is based on IC1 which is a UA3730 keypad combination lock
IC. This device scans the keypad and, when the correct code is entered, the
Alarm On/Off output toggles and the Lock Solenoid output goes high for two
seconds. The piezo buzzer echoes the key presses.
a good idea to use your telephone
number).
The keypad used is a standard 3
x 4 unit as used in some telephone
diallers. It includes the digits 0-9
plus “✳” and “#” keys. Only the digits
(0-9) can be used as part of the code
but you can use the same digit more
than once.
Three outputs are provided by the
Keypad Combination Lock: (1) Lock
Solenoid (momentary); (2) Alarm On/
Off (latched); and (3) Siren. The unit
is easy to operate – all you have to
do is enter the correct code and press
the “#” key. A small piezo transducer
“beeps” briefly (for 0.2s) each time a
key is pressed.
Because it can only register one key
at a time, you can’t fool the unit by
simultaneously pressing all the keys
at once. In addition, the IC includes
a time-out feature so that you only
have one minute to complete the code
entry after the first key is pressed.
If you take longer than one minute,
the IC resets and you have to start all
over again.
When the correct code is entered,
the Door Lock output goes high
for two seconds (to open the door)
and lights a red indicator LED. By
contrast, the Alarm On/Off output
alternately toggles between high
(+12V) and open circuit (O/C); ie, it
changes state each time the correct
code is entered.
The Alarm On/Off output can be
used for switching burglar alarms or
other equipment on and off, either
directly or via a relay.
Wrong code
If the wrong code is entered, the
transducer beeps once but only on
the first two attempts. After the third
incorrect attempt, the Siren output
goes low for 60 seconds to sound
an external siren or trigger a central
alarm system. During this period, the
transducer beeps once every second
and the circuit lights an orange indicator LED.
The circuit subsequently automatically resets at the end of the 1-minute
alarm period. Alternatively, the circuit
can be reset at any time during the
alarm period by entering the correct
code.
Note that the use of any output is
entirely optional. You might elect to
Features Of The Keypad Combination Lock
•
•
•
•
Based on a dedicated combination lock IC.
•
•
•
LED indicators for Lock Solenoid and Siren outputs.
•
Programmed code can be maintained in the event of power failure using three
dry cells to provide battery backup.
Accepts codes up to 12 digits long for 1012 possible combinations.
Code is stored by the IC and is programmed from the keypad.
Three outputs: (1) Lock Solenoid (momentary); (2) Alarm On/Off (latched);
and Siren (1-minute alarm).
Siren output activated if three incorrect codes entered in sequence.
Piezo buzzer echoes key presses; beeps once every second for duration of
Siren output.
September 1995 17
+12V
GND
SIREN
DOOR LOCK
D6
0.1
LED2
Q2
D5
1k
1k
10uF
LK1
S P
PIEZO
BUZZER
Q3
IC1
UA3730
12k
270pF
10uF
1k
Q1
D4
1000uF
IC2
4.7k
1k
1k
1
D1
D2
D3
10k
ALARM ON/OFF
LED1
2 3 7 4 5 16
TO CORRESPONDING
NUMBERS ON KEYPAD
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TO CORRESPONDING
NUMBERS ON PCB
BACK OF KEYPAD
Fig.2: install the parts on the PC board
as shown in this layout diagram. The
two LEDs can either be mounted on the
PC board, or they can be installed along
with the keypad on the front panel of a
case or switch plate.
use only the Lock Solenoid output, for
example, and leave the Alarm On/Off
and Siren outputs disconnected.
Supply requirements
Because it is a CMOS device, the
UA3730 has a typical quiescent current of just 5µA. This makes it suitable
for battery backup using dry cells,
since these will last for the length of
their shelf-life. In fact, battery backup
18 Silicon Chip
Take particular care when wiring the keypad, as some of the leads of the
7-way cable from the PC board have to be crossed over as shown here. Just
be sure to connect the wiring exactly as shown in Fig.2.
for the IC is desirable since the
memory is volatile. This means
that the programmed code is lost
if the power is interrupted, with
the unit reverting to its default
code of 0#.
The circuit itself is powered
from a 12V DC source, with the
current requirements dictated by
the external load. A typical door
lock solenoid will require a supply capable of delivering about
400mA but many applications
will require only 100mA or less.
Battery backup is not a feature
of the original circuit but it can be
easily added, as we shall see later
on. Note that the suggested circuit
using dry cells is only suitable
for maintaining the programmed
code in the IC until regular power
is restored.
Circuit details
Refer now to Fig.1 for the circuit details. Apart from the IC
and the keypad, there are just
two transistors, a 3-terminal regulator, a piezo transducer and a few
minor parts.
R1 and C1 are the timing components for IC1’s on-board oscillator.
In operation, IC1 scans the keyboard
matrix and decodes the key presses.
The internal logic of the IC then de
cides whether or not the correct code
has been entered and whether or not
it has been entered in the required
1-minute period.
Pins 17, 16 & 15 are the device
outputs. Normally, pin 17 of IC1 is
high and so PNP transistor Q1 is off.
However, each time the correct code
is entered, pin 17 goes low for two
seconds and so Q1 briefly turns on
and supplies current to the door lock
solenoid. It also supplies current to
LED 1 via a 1kΩ limiting resistor.
At the same time, pin 16 changes
state. If it was high before the code
was entered, it switches low and Q2
turns on. Conversely, if it was low, it
switches high and Q2 turns off; ie, pin
16 behaves as a latching output.
The third output, pin 15, is normally high but switches low for one
minute if three incorrect codes are
entered in a row. This lights LED 2
and also drives an external siren circuit via diode D5 and current limiting
resistor R4. At the end of the 1-minute
period, IC1 resets and pin 15 switches
high again.
Pin 14 is the piezo driver output.
Each time a key is pressed, this output generates a 3kHz signal for 0.2s
which drives Q3. Q3 in turn drives
the piezo transducer (B1) with this
3kHz pulse signal. R7 is necessary
to provide a DC current path for the
transistor.
In addition, pin 14 generates a 0.2s
burst at 3kHz each time an incorrect
code is entered. It also generates a
3kHz burst every second for a period
of one minute if three incorrect codes
are entered (ie, while pin 15 is low).
Pin 13 is used to control the pro-
This view shows
the programming
jumper in the store
(S) position. It
must be placed in
the program (P)
position when a
new code is to be
programmed into
the UA3730 IC.
gramming function of IC1. Normally,
this pin is left floating but is grounded
(by installing link LK1) to program in
a new code. The programming link is
then removed again after the new code
has been entered.
This task has been made easy by
installing a pair of adjacent 2-way pin
headers on the PC board. A jumper is
then used to short out two of the pins
in one position to provide the programming link. The other position is
simply used to store the jumper when
programming has been completed.
The Lock Solenoid output of the
circuit can be used to drive a 12V
door strike such as the unit shown
here (available from locksmiths).
Power for the circuit comes from
an external 12V supply (battery or DC
plugpack) and is applied to 3-terminal regulator IC2 via reverse polarity
protection diode D6. The 5V regulated
output from IC2 is then applied to pin
9 of IC1. Capacitors C3, C4 & C5 decouple the input and output terminals
of the regulator respectively.
Note that transistors Q1 & Q2 are
powered directly from the +12V rail.
Construction
All the parts except the buzzer and
the keypad are mounted on a PC board
measuring 105 x 60mm. This board
carries a screen printed overlay so that
you can see at a glance where each
part fits. Fig.2 shows the assembly
details.
No particular order need be followed when installing the parts on
the PC board but take care to ensure
that all polarised parts are correctly
oriented. In particular, note that the
two BD140 transistors are installed
with their metal faces towards the
LEDs.
There are four wire links on the
board. Install these at the locations
shown and install the two 2-way pin
headers at the LK1 position. Separate
pin headers are also installed for the
buzzer terminals. Resistors R2 and
R3 are shown as 2.2kΩ types on the
PC board screened overlay but we
recommend that you reduce them to
1kΩ, in line with the circuit diagram.
Depending on the application, the
two LEDs can either be installed directly on the PC board, as shown in
Fig.2, or connected to the board via
flying leads. Make sure that the LEDs
are correctly oriented – the anode lead
is usually (but not always) the longer
of the two. It is a good idea to check
PARTS LIST
1 PC board, 105 x 60mm,
copyright Oatley Electronics
1 keypad
1 12V piezo transducer
1 plastic cable tie
1 200mm-length 7-way ribbon
cable
1 18-pin IC socket
3 2-way pin headers
1 jumper (for pin headers)
1 80mm-length of tinned copper
wire (for links)
Semiconductors
1 UA3730 CMOS electronic lock
(IC1)
1 78L05 3-terminal regulator
(IC2)
2 BD140 PNP transistors
(Q1,Q2)
1 BC548 NPN transistor (Q3)
1 5mm red LED (LED1)
1 5mm orange (LED2)
3 1N4148 signal diodes (D1-D3)
3 1N4004 silicon diodes (D4-D6)
Capacitors
1 1000µF 16VW electrolytic
2 10µF 16VW electrolytic
1 0.1µF monolithic
1 270pF ceramic
Resistors
1 12kΩ
1 10kΩ
1 4.7kΩ
5 1kΩ
WHERE TO BUY A KIT
A kit of parts comprising the PC
board, all on-board parts, the
keypad and the piezo transducer
is available from Oatley Electronics
for $20 plus $4 p&p. A suitable
plastic case (see photo) costs an
extra $4. Contact Oatley Electron
ics, PO Box 89, Oatley, NSW 2223.
Phone (02) 579 4985 or fax (02)
570 7910.
Note: copyright the PC board
associated with this design is
retained by Oatley Electronics
this point with your multimeter before
the LEDs are installed. The red LED is
used for LED 1 (alarm on/off), while
the orange LED is used for LED 2 (ie,
siren indication).
The IC is best left until last. It is
installed in an IC socket and must be
oriented so that its pin 1 is adjacent
to R1 (12kΩ).
September 1995 19
Adding Battery Backup & Alarm On/Off Indication
+12V
R3
1k
TO PIN16
IC1
E
B
Q2
BD140
C
Programming
1k
LED3
12V
RELAY
D9
1N4004
Fig.3: this diagram shows how to add LED indication
and a relay to the Alarm On/Off output. If you don’t
need the relay, just leave it (and D9) out.
+12V
D6
1N4004
IN
C3
1000
IC2
78L05
GND
2x1N4004
D7
OUT
C4
10
D8
C5
0.1
TO PIN9
IC1
4.5V
Fig.4: here’s how to add battery backup to the circuit. Note
that this circuit is only intended to maintain the code in the
UA3730 IC in the event of a power failure.
Once the board assembly is completed, it can be wired to the keypad via a
7-way ribbon cable. A cable length of
150mm should be sufficient for most
applications.
You will need to take extreme care
when making the connections to the
keypad, since some of the leads must
be crossed over to reach their correct
terminals. Just ignore the screened “1”
on the PC board and connect the leads
as shown in Fig.3.
A plastic cable tie is used to anchor
the keypad cable to the PC board, to
stop the leads from coming adrift.
Finally, the piezo transducer can be
wired into circuit. Be sure to connect
the red lead to the positive terminal.
The Keypad Combination Lock is now
ready for testing.
Testing
All you have to do here is connect
a 12V DC power supply to the unit
and try it out.
Wait a few seconds after switch on
for the circuit to reset correctly – the
piezo transducer will beep when all
is ready. Now press 0# and check that
LED 1 lights for two seconds and then
goes out again. If it does, then all is
20 Silicon Chip
If you strike problems, first check
that the keypad is wired correctly,
as it’s easy to make a mistake here.
This done, check that all polarised
parts are correctly oriented and that
the correct part has been used at each
location.
well and you can check the other two
outputs.
To do this, use a multimeter (set to
a low DC range) to monitor the Alarm
On/Off output and check that this output toggles each time the correct code
is entered. This done, check that the
transducer beeps once every second
and that LED 2 lights for a period of
one minute when three incorrect codes
are entered.
Changing The Code
The default code for the unit is
“0” and this is entered by pressing “0” on the keypad and then
pressing the “#” key. To change
the code:
(1) Place the jumper in the “P”
(program) position of LK1.
(2) Enter the desired code (up to
12 digits).
(3) Press the “✳” key.
(4) Transfer the jumper to the “S”
(store) position of LK1 (this is
necessary, otherwise the unit can
be quickly reprogrammed from
the keypad).
To program the unit, first install the
jumper between the two pin header
terminals labelled “P” at the LK1 position (ie, between the two righthand
terminals) – see Fig.2. Pin 13 of IC1
is now grounded. Now enter in the
required code (up to 12 digits), press
the “✳” key and transfer the jumper to
the store (S) position.
Your new code is now programmed
into the lock. Check that the unit will
recognise this code by keying it in and
pressing the “#” key.
Options
(1) Alarm On/Off Indicator: Most
burglar alarms sound a small buzzer
during the exit and entry periods, so a
LED indicator was considered unnecessary for the Alarm On/Off output. If
you do need a LED indicator on this
output, then it can be easily added as
shown in Fig.3.
Fig.3 also shows how this output
could be used to drive a relay. Note that
a diode must be connected across the
relay coil to protect Q2 from voltage
spikes when the relay turns off.
(2) Battery Backup: A 4.5V battery
pack (eg, three 1.5V dry cells) and a
couple of 1N4004 diodes are all that
are required to maintain the code programmed into IC1 if the power fails.
Fig.4 shows how this is done.
The circuit works like this: normally, the cathode of D7 is at 4.5V and so
D8 will be reverse biased and no current flows from the batteries. However,
if the power fails, D8 becomes forward
biased and the backup batteries take
over and supply IC1.
D7 can be easily added to the
existing PC board by substituting it
for the wire link immediately below
the 1000µF capacitor (C3). Be sure to
install it with its cathode lead to the
right. D8 can be wired in series with
the positive supply lead from the
batteries and its cathode connected
to D7’s cathode.
(3) Door Sensor: Although not
shown on the circuit of Fig.1, pin 12 is
designated as the on/off sensor input.
This pin is normally left floating but if
YOU CAN
AFFORD
AN INTERNATIONAL
SATELLITE TV
SYSTEM
SATELLITE ENTHUSIASTS
STARTER KIT
The two LED indicators can be affixed to the plastic case using epoxy resin, as
shown here. Similarly, the keypad is attached by first drilling clearance holes
for its four corner posts and then using epoxy resin to glue these corner posts to
the inside of the case.
it is shorted to the commoned anodes
of D1-D3, the siren output goes low for
one minute (ie, the effect is the same
as if three incorrect codes are entered
in sequence).
Despite not being shown on the
circuit, provision for this feature has
been made on the PC board. All you
have to do is wire the two unused pads
to a normally open switch (eg, a reed
switch or an under-carpet pressure
mat), or even several switches wired
in parallel. These switches could be
used to detect other doors or windows
being forced.
YOUR OWN INTERNATIONAL
SYSTEM FROM ONLY:
FREE RECEPTION FROM
Installation
The exact method of installation
will depend on the application but
make sure that the electronic circuitry is secure so that the keypad
cannot be circumvented.
In most cases, the keypad
can be mounted on a blank
mains wall plate and this can
be installed with the PC board
behind it in a wall cavity. This
means that the two indicator
LEDs would also have to be
mounted on the wall plate (eg,
directly beneath the keypad)
and connected to the PC board
via flying leads. The LEDs can
be secured using epoxy resin.
Another option is to mount
the keypad and circuitry in
a plastic utility case and this
method would be suitable for
low-security applications.
Power for the circuit can be
derived either from a DC plug
pack supply or from an existing
alarm power supply, preferably
with battery backup. Note that
Mounting the circuit in a plastic case is OK
if the alarm system has a battery
for low-security applications. Alternatively,
backup, then the optional batyou can mount the keypad on a blank mains
tery backup circuit depicted in
wall plate and hide the PC board close by in
Fig.3 is unnecessary.
SC
the wall cavity.
Asiasat II, Gorizont, Palapa,
Panamsat, Intelsat
HERE'S WHAT YOU GET:
●
●
●
●
●
●
400 channel dual input receiver
preprogrammed for all viewable satellites
1.8m solid ground mount dish
20°K LNBF
25m coaxial cable
easy set up instructions
regular customer newsletters
BEWARE OF IMITATORS
Direct Importer: AV-COMM PTY. LTD.
PO BOX 225, Balgowlah NSW 2093
Tel: (02) 9949 7417 / 9948 2667
Fax: (02) 9949 7095
VISIT OUR INTERNET SITE http://www.avcomm.com.au
YES GARRY, please send me more
information on international band
satellite systems.
Name: __________________________________
Address: ________________________________
____________________P'code:
__________
Phone: (_______) ________________________
ACN 002 174 478
September 1995 21
Disguise your voice
to sound like Darth
Vader from “Star
Wars” or a Cylon
from “Star Trek”.
With the added
menace of a new
strange-sounding
voice, you too can
travel the galaxy
for profit and
entertainment.
By JOHN CLARKE
e
c
i
o
V
r
e
d
Va
T
HE DARTH VADER and Cylon
characters have always had
great appeal, probably because
of their distinctive metallic voice
styles. This simple project lets you
imitate the dastardly Darth and other
diabolical characters from the nether
regions of the galaxy. All you do is
switch it on, speak into a small electret
microphone and adjust a single pot to
get the effect you want.
Now it’s quite possible that some
people might not see the need for
building such a handy space-war accessory as this. To others, the reasons
will be self-evident – after all, why
should you be forced to stick with your
own everyday boring voice?
As can be seen from the photos,
22 Silicon Chip
the Vader Voice is housed in a small
plastic case. The controls include an
effects rate adjustment (which varies
the type of sound), a volume control
to set the output level from the loudspeaker and an on/off switch. The
loudspeaker is mounted inside the
case while the microphone is located
in a small film canister connected via
a length of shielded cable.
How it works
Fig.1 shows the block diagram for
the Vader Voice. The action starts on
the lefthand side, where an electret
microphone feeds signal to an op amp
stage (IC1a) which has a gain of about
15. A chopper circuit (ie, CMOS switch
IC2) then switches the signal on and
off at a rate determined by oscillator
stage IC3 and potentiometer VR1.
The output from the chopper stage is
fed to a 3kHz low-pass filter based on
IC1b. This stage removes the residual
signals produced by the switching
action in IC2. Finally, IC4 feeds the
processed signal to power amplifier
stage IC4 via volume control VR2.
Fig.2 illustrates how the circuit
produces the sound ef
fects. Waveform A is the audio signal from the
microphone after passing through
amplifier IC1a, while waveform B is
the square wave output from the oscillator. Waveform C shows the audio
signal after it has been “chopped” at
the oscillator frequency.
The bottom waveform at D shows
the corresponding output from the
low-pass filter (IC1b). Note that this
waveform is quite different in appearance to the original waveform shown
at A and it sounds correspondingly
different too.
Refer now to Fig.3 for the complete
circuit. Apart from the microphone
and loudspeaker, it uses four lowcost ICs plus a few resistors and
capacitors.
The electret microphone requires
a bias in order to function. This is
supplied via a 10kΩ resistor which is
decoupled from the supply rail via a
1kΩ resistor and 33µF capacitor. This
decoupling arrangement is necessary
to prevent supply line fluc
tuations
caused by the power amplifier stage
from modulating the microphone and
causing positive feedback.
The signal from the electret microphone is fed via a .0033µF capacitor
to pin 3 of op amp IC1a. This stage is
connected as a non-inverting amplifier
with a gain of about 15, as set by the
470kΩ feedback resistor and the 33kΩ
resistor on pin 2 (ie, Gain = 1 + 470/33
= 15.2).
IC1a is biased at half the supply
voltage via two 220kΩ resistors and the
associated 470kΩ resistor connected to
pin 10. A 10µF electrolytic capacitor
decouples the half-supply voltage,
which is also used to bias pins 2 & 1
of IC2 and pin 5 of op amp IC1b. As
a result of this bias arrangement, the
output from IC1a swings above and
below +4.5V.
AMPLIFIER
x15.5
MICROPHONE
IC1a
3kHz LOW
PASS FILTER
IC1b
CHOPPER
IC2
A
C
POWER
AMPLIFIER
D
VOLUME
VR2
IC4
B
EFFECT
RATE
VR1
LOUDSPEAKER
OSCILLATOR
IC3
Fig.1 (above): block diagram of the
Vader Voice. The signal from the
microphone is amplified in IC1a and
“chopped” in IC2 at a rate set by
oscillator IC3. The resulting signal is
ten filtered in IC1b and fed to audio
amplifier stage IC4.
A
B
Fig.2 (right): this diagram shows
the effect on the input waveform at
various points in the circuit. Note
that the output waveform (D) is quite
different to the input waveform (A).
The oscillator stage is formed by IC3
which is a 7555 CMOS timer. This stage
generates a square wave output with
a frequency in the range from 1.3kHz
to 14kHz, depending on the setting of
VR1. Let’s see how it works.
At switch on, the 0.1µF timing
capacitor is initially dis
c harged
and the output at pin 3 is high. The
0.1µF capacitor then charges via the
1kΩ resistor and VR1 until it reaches
2/ Vcc (ie, 2/ the supply voltage).
3
3
When it does, pin 3 switches low
C
D
and the timing capacitor discharges
via the 1kΩ resistor and VR1 until it
reaches 1/3Vcc. This switches pin 3
high again and so the process is repeated indefinitely while ever power
is applied.
Fig.3 (below): the final circuit uses
7555 timer IC3 to drive CMOS switch
IC2 and this stage in turn chops the
audio waveform from IC1a. IC1b is
the 3kHz low-pass filter stage and this
drives IC4 via volume control VR2.
S1
1k
33
10k
0.1
220k
.0033
470k
MIC
220k
8
3
10
16VW
33k
2
IC1a
LM358
9V
IC2
4066
1
.0068
14
2
13
470k
470k
1
7
10k
.012
22k
10k
.01
.001
10k
6
5
4
470k
7
IC1b
VOLUME
VR2
10k LOG
RATE
VR1
10k LIN
+9V
4
1k
6
8
3
6
5
IC4
2 LM386
4 .047
100
16VW
8W
10
0.1
3
IC3
7555
2
100
16VW
0.18
1
VADER VOICE
0.1
September 1995 23
1
100uF
33k
470k
220k
220k
IC2
4066
.01
.012
C
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
9V
BATTERY
AND CLIP
1 .0033
.047
TABLE 2: CAPACITOR CODES
10uF
IC1
LM358
0.1
IC3
7555
0.1
0.1
1
D
.0068
470k
A
470k
B
1k
100uF
S1
10k
IEC Code
180n
100n
47n
12n
10n
6n8
3n3
1n0
EIA Code
184
104
473
123
103
682
332
102
10k
0.18
1
1k
22k
10k
470k
10
IC4
LM386
10k
Value
0.18µF
0.1µF
.047µF
.012µF
.01µF
.0068µF
.0033µF
.001µF
.001
33uF
C
the output each time the potentiometer
was operated.
Following VR2, the signal is coupled to pin 3 of IC4, an LM386 audio
amplifier which is capable of driving
an 8Ω loudspeaker at an output power of up to 1W. Its output appears at
pin 5 and drives the loudspeaker via
a 100µF capacitor which rolls off the
response below about 200Hz. In addition, a Zobel network consisting of
a .047µF capacitor and a 10Ω resistor
is connected across the output of IC4
to prevent high frequency instability.
Power for the circuit comes from a
9V battery and is applied via on/off
switch S1. A 100µF electrolytic capac
itor provides supply line decoupling,
to minimise variations due to the peak
currents through the LM386 audio
amplifier.
D
VR2
A
B
SPEAKER
VR1
MICROPHONE
Fig.4: install the parts on the PC board and complete the wiring as shown in
this diagram. Note that shielded cable is used for the connections to volume
control VR2 and to the electret microphone.
The square wave output at pin 3 of
IC3 toggles CMOS analog switch IC2 on
and off. When pin 3 of IC3 is high, the
CMOS switch is closed. Conversely,
when pin 3 is low, the CMOS switch
is open. As a result, the signal from
IC1a is gated at the oscillator frequency
before it is fed to IC1b.
IC1b and its associated resistors
and capacitors form the third order
Construction
low-pass filter. This rolls off the signal above 3kHz at 60dB per decade
(ie, 20dB/octave). This means that
at 30kHz the signal is attenuated by
60dB.
The filtered signal appears at pin 7
of IC1b and is AC-coupled via a 0.18µF
capacitor to volume control VR2. This
AC coupling prevents DC from flowing
in VR2, which would cause noise in
A PC board coded 08310951 carries
most of the parts for the prototype.
This board was housed in a plastic case
measuring 130 x 67 x 43mm, while a
self-adhesive label was designed for
the front panel.
Fig.4 shows the wiring details. Start
the PC board assembly by installing PC
stakes at all external wiring points and
at the S1 position. This done, install
TABLE 1: RESISTOR COLOUR CODES
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
No.
4
2
1
1
4
2
1
24 Silicon Chip
Value
470kΩ
220kΩ
33kΩ
22kΩ
10kΩ
1kΩ
10Ω
4-Band Code (1%)
yellow violet yellow brown
red red yellow brown
orange orange orange brown
red red orange brown
brown black orange brown
brown black red brown
brown black black brown
5-Band Code (1%)
yellow violet black orange brown
red red black orange brown
orange orange black red brown
red red black red brown
brown black black red brown
brown black black brown brown
brown black black gold brown
PARTS LIST
1 PC board, code 08310951, 82
x 62mm
1 plastic case, 130 x 67 x 43mm
1 front panel label, 62 x 212mm
2 knobs
1 SPDT toggle switch (S1)
1 57mm diameter 8-ohm
loudspeaker
1 9V battery clip
1 9V battery
12 PC stakes
1 electret microphone insert
1 16mm 10kΩ linear pot (VR1)
1 16mm 10kΩ log pot (VR2)
1 800mm-length of shielded
cable
1 80mm-length of twin speaker
wire
1 200mm-length of hookup wire
1 20mm-length of 0.8mm tinned
copper wire
Semiconductors
1 LM358N dual op amp (IC1)
1 4066B quad analog switch
(IC2)
1 7555 CMOS timer (IC3)
1 LM386N audio amplifier (IC4)
The PC board was secured by clipping it into slots that run along either side of
the case, while the loudspeaker was fastened to the lid using contact adhesive.
Make sure that the battery clip is correctly wired to the board.
the wire link adjacent to IC2, then
install the resistors and capacitors.
Tables 1 & 2 show the resistor and
capacitors codes but it is also a good
idea to check the resistor values using
a multimeter, as some colours can be
difficult to read.
Take care to ensure that the four
electrolytic capacitors are correctly
oriented. In particular, note that the
two 100µF capacitors are oriented in
opposite directions.
The three ICs can now be installed,
again taking care to ensure that they
are all correctly oriented. It is quite
easy to identify pin 1 of an IC, as it is
always adjacent to a dot or notch in
one end of the IC’s body (see Fig.4). Be
careful not to get the 8-pin ICs mixed
up and don’t use a conventional 555
timer for IC3. It must be a CMOS 7555
type to ensure low battery drain.
Switch S1 is mounted on top of the
PC stakes, to give it sufficient height
to later protrude through the front
panel. When the PC board has been
completed, it can be clipped into the
case as shown in the photo.
Next, affix the adhesive label to the
lid of the case and use it as a template
for drilling the holes. You will have to
drill holes for the Volume and Effect
pots, the Power switch and the loudspeaker grille. A small hole is also
required in one end of the case for the
microphone lead.
Take care when mounting the two
pots on the lid. VR1 (Effects) is a 10kΩ
linear type, while VR2 (Volume) is
a 10kΩ log type. The loudspeaker is
mounted using contact adhesive.
Once everything is in position, the
wiring can be completed as shown in
Fig.4. Light-duty figure-8 cable is used
Capacitors
2 100µF 16VW PC electrolytic
1 33µF 16VW PC electrolytic
1 10µF 16VW PC electrolytic
1 0.18µF MKT polyester
3 0.1µF MKT polyester
1 .047µF MKT polyester
1 .012µF MKT polyester
1 .01µF MKT polyester
1 .0068µF MKT polyester
1 .0033µF MKT polyester
1 .001µF MKT polyester
Resistors (0.25W, 1%)
4 470kΩ
4 10kΩ
2 220kΩ
2 1kΩ
1 33kΩ
1 10Ω
1 22kΩ
Miscellaneous
Plastic 35mm film canister, epoxy
resin, solder
for the loudspeaker connections and
for wiring the Effects pot, while shielded cable must be used for the Volume
control wiring. The battery clip can
also be wired in at this stage –be sure
to connect the red lead to the positive
terminal on the PC board.
Shielded cable must also be used
September 1995 25
Fig.5: this is the
full-size etching
pattern for the
PC board. Check
your board
carefully before
installing any
parts.
for the microphone lead. Use a length
of about 600mm and feed it through
the end of the case before soldering
it to the PC board terminals. The
microphone itself can be mounted in
a plastic film canister or some other
similar plastic container.
In the prototype, the microphone
was mounted through a hole drilled in
the cap of the film canister and secured
with a dab of epoxy. The lead passes
through a second hole drilled in the
bottom of the canister.
Finally, the battery can be clipped
into position and the lid attached.
Testing
To test the project, simply switch
it on, wind the volume control up
and speak into the microphone. You
should immediately be rewarded with
a metallic sounding voice. Adjust the
Effects pot (VR1) until you obtain the
sound you want. All you need now is
a helmet, a black cloak, a breathing
mask and a light stick to terrorise the
galaxy, or just the immediate neighbourhood.
If Darth doesn’t do his stuff, first
check that each com
ponent is in
its correct location and that all polarised parts are correctly oriented.
You should also carefully check the
underside of the PC board for solder
bridges or missed (or bad) solder
connections.
Next, check for +9V on pin 8 of IC1,
pin 14 of IC2, pins 4 & 8 of IC3 and pin
6 of IC4. Pins 2 & 5 of IC1 should be
at +4.5V, as should pins 1 & 2 of IC2.
Check the relevant circuit components
carefully if you do encounter any incorrect voltages.
If all you get is your normal amplified voice, check that oscillator IC3
is working correctly. It should have
an average voltage of 4.5V at pin 3,
as measured on a multimeter. If you
don’t get any sound at all, try bridging
pins 2 & 1 on IC2. This will tell you
whether or not CMOS switch IC2 is
functioning, or whether the fault lies
elsewhere in the circuit.
SC
ANOTHER GREAT DEAL FROM MACSERVICE
100MHz Tektronix 465M Oscilloscope
2-Channel, Delayed Timebase
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Bandwidth & Rise Time: DC to 100MHz (-3dB) and 3.5ns or
less for DC coupling and -15°C to +55°C.
Bandwidth Limit Mode: Bandwidth limited to 20MHz.
Deflection Factor: 5mV/div to 5V/div in 10 steps (1-2-5 sequence). DC accuracy: ±2% 0-40°C; ±3% -15-0°C, 40-55°C.
Uncalibrated, continuously variable between settings, and to
at least 12.5V/div.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: 25:1 to 10MHz; 10:1 from
10-50MHz, 6cm sinewave. (ADD Mode with Ch 2 inverted.)
Display Modes: Ch 1, Ch 2 (normal or inverted), alternate,
chopped (250kHz rate), added, X-Y.
Input R and C: 1MΩ ±2%; approx 20pF.
Max Input Voltage: DC or AC coupled ±250VDC + peak AC at
50kHz, derated above 50KHz.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
Timebase A: 0.5s/div to 0.05µs/div in 22 steps (1-2-5
sequence). X10 mag extends fastest sweep rate to 5ns/div.
Timebase B: 50ms/div to 0.05µs/div in 19 steps (1-2-5 sequence). X10 mag extends maximum sweep rate to 5ns/div.
Horizontal Display Modes: A, A Intensified by B, B delayed
by A, and mixed.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Calibrated Delay Time: Continuous from 0.1µs to at least 5s
after the start of the delaying A sweep.
Differential Time Measurement Accuracy: for measurements
of two or more major dial divisions: +15°C to +35°C 1% + 0.1%
of full scale; 0°C to +55°C additional 1% allowed.
TRIGGERING A & B
A Trigger Modes: Normal Sweep is triggered by an internal
vertical amplifier signal, external signal, or internal power line
signal. A bright baseline is provided only in presence of trigger
signal. Automatic: a bright baseline is displayed in the absence
of input signals. Triggering is the same as normal-mode above
40Hz. Single (main time base only). The sweep occurs once
with the same triggering as normal. The capability to re-arm
the sweep and illuminate the reset lamp is provided. The sweep
activates when the next trigger is applied for rearming.
A Trigger Holdoff: Increases A sweep holdoff time to at least
10X the TIME/DIV settings, except at 0.2s and 0.5s.
Trigger View: View external and internal trigger signals; Ext
X1, 100mV/div, Ext -: 10, 1V/div.
Level and Slope: Internal, permits triggering at any point on
the positive or negative slopes of the displayed waveform.
External, permits continuously variable triggering on any level
between +1.0V and -1.0V on either slope of the trigger signal.
A Sources: Ch 1, Ch 2, NORM (all display modes triggered by
the combined waveforms from Ch 1 and 2), LINE, EXT, EXT
:-10. B Sources: B starts after delay time; Ch 1, Ch 2, NORM,
EXT, EXT :-10.
Optional cover for
CRT screen – $35
through the vertical system. Continuously variable between
steps and to at least 12.5V/div.
X Axis Bandwidth: DC to at least 4MHz; Y Axis Bandwidth:
DC to 100MHz; X-Y Phase: Less than 3° from DC to 50kHz.
DISPLAY
CRT: 5-inch, rectangular tube; 8 x 10cm display; P31 phosphor. Graticule: Internal, non-parallax; illuminated. 8 x 10cm
markings with horizontal and vertical centerlines further marked
in 0.2cm increments. 10% and 90%
for rise time measurements.
Australia’s Largest Remarketer of markings
Graticule Illumination: variable. Beam
Test & Measurement Equipment
Finder: Limits the display to within the
graticule area and provides a visible
9500; Fax: (03) 9562 9590
display when pushed.
X-Y OPERATION
Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div in 10 steps (1-2-5 sequence)
MACSERVICE PTY LTD
20 Fulton Street, Oakleigh Sth, Vic., 3167. Tel: (03) 9562
**Illustrations are representative only. Products listed are refurbished unless otherwise stated.
26 Silicon Chip
$900
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Rod Irving Electronics Pty Ltd
September 1995 27
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
Rod Irving Electronics Pty Ltd
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Rod Irving Electronics Pty Ltd
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
Rod Irving Electronics Pty Ltd
30 Silicon Chip
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Rod Irving Electronics Pty Ltd
September 1995 31
CIRCUIT NOTEBOOK
Interesting circuit ideas which we have checked but not built and tested. Contributions from
readers are welcome and will be paid for at standard rates.
+12V
+8V
18k
FROM
COIL
NEGATIVE
Q1
BC337
33k
0.5W
10k
.022
.01
10k
B
D1
1N4004
10k
2
C
8
IC1a
3 LM393
E
100k
10k
+12V FROM
IGNITION
SWITCH
10
ZD1
16V
1W
IN
100
16VW
Rev limit indicator
for rally cars
For racing and rally vehicles, knowing precisely when to change gear
can give you the edge in competition.
While a tachometer will give a reliable indication of the engine revs, it is
not always easy to read when there
is a lot of action going on outside the
windscreen.
This rev limit indicator will provide
a warning light above a preset RPM.
The light is located in a position which
is in
stantly noticed by the driver,
so that the gear changing point can
be indicated without looking at the
tachometer.
The circuit takes the RPM signal
from the negative (switched) side of
the ignition coil. This means that the
circuit will operate from any type of
ignition system whether driven by
Car courtesy light
monitor & extender
This circuit monitors the on-time of
your car’s interior light. If the car door
is left ajar, the light will be switched
off after a preset time. This prevents
an “early-morning” flat battery due
to the interior light(s) being left on
all night because a door has not been
shut properly.
32 Silicon Chip
REG1
7808
GND
10k
1k
1
10k
100k
5
10
FILTER
2.2k
1M
6
7
IC1b
12V
INDICATOR
Q2
BD681
B
E
4
REV
LIMIT
VR1
2k
C
LAMP
DRIVER
COMPARATOR
INVERTER
OUT
10
16VW
PLASTIC
SIDE
B
+8V
E
C
VIEWED FROM
BELOW
E
C
B
I GO
points, Hall Effect sensor, reluctor or
optical pick-up.
The 33kΩ and 10kΩ resistors divide
the voltage from the coil and high
frequency spikes are suppressed with
a .01µF capacitor. The signal is then
AC-coupled to the base of transistor
Q1, while diode D1 clamps negative
swings of the input signal.
The collector of Q1 will normally
be high and will go low whenever the
coil fires. Q1’s pulse output is inverted
by IC1a, a comparator connected as
an inverter. Pin 3, the non-inverting
input, is referenced to about half
the supply voltage using two 10kΩ
resistors across the 8V rail. A small
amount of positive feedback is applied
to pin 3 using the 100kΩ resistor from
pin 1. This increases the hysteresis to
prevent high frequency oscillation at
the switching point.
A 1kΩ resistor is used as a pullup
between pin 1 and the +8V rail since
these comparator outputs are open
collector. A 10kΩ resistor and 10µF
capacitor filter the signal from pin 1.
The higher the engine RPM, the
higher the filtered voltage which is
fed to pin 5 of comparator IC1b. Here,
the reference voltage for the inverting
input (pin 6) is set by the 10kΩ resistor
and trimpot VR1, which determines
the rev limit. When the output of
IC1b output goes high, at the rev limit,
transistor Q2 is turned on to drive the
indicator lamp.
The circuit is powered via an 8V
regulator which is protected against
voltage transients using a 10Ω resistor
and 16V zener diode. Note that the
lamp is powered directly from 12V
rather than the 8V regulator output.
VR1 is adjusted so that the lamp
lights at the desired gear change point.
SILICON CHIP
In addition, an on-time extender
has been incorporated into the circuit.
This ensures that the interior light
stays on for seven seconds after the
door has been shut.
When the car door is opened, S1
closes and capacitor C1 begins to
charge via R4 (1MΩ). At the same
time, pin 3 of IC1a is pulled low and
so its output at pin 4 switches high.
This in turn holds Mosfet Q1 on via
D2, inverter IC1d and paralleled inverters IC1e & IC1f. Q1 in turn drives
the courtesy lamp.
If the door is left open, C1 continues
charging and eventually pin 1 of IC1a
is pulled high. When this happens,
pin 2 of IC1a switches low and Q1
and the courtesy lamp turn off (after
approximately 70 seconds).
IC1b, IC1c and their associated
parts provide the on-time extension
feature. When the
R2
1k
door is opened,
+12V
C3
pin 3 of IC1b is
ZD1
100
also pulled low and
COURTESY
9.6V
16VW
R3
R4
LAMP
so its output (pin
33k
1M
IC1e
Q1
4) switches high
IC1a
C1
D2
11
10
BUZ71A
40106
100
R6
and discharges C2.
1N4148
IC1d
14
16VW
220
9
2
8
1
When the door is
IC1f
subsequently shut,
13
7
12
R5
pin 4 of IC1b goes
D3
100k
1N4148
low again and C2
C2
IC1b
IC1c
begins charging via
47
3
5
4
6
R5.
R1
16VW
D u r i n g C 2 ’s
470
charging period,
Note that this circuit is designed for
the input to IC1c is
negative earth electrical systems, with
D1
1N4148
low and so its pin 6
the door switches in the negative line.
output is high. This
It will have to be modified for positive
DOOR
S1
holds Q1 on via D3,
earth vehicles, or for vehicles with the
IC1d, IC1e & IC1f.
full battery voltage is applied to the door switches in the positive line.
When C2 charges,
interior light. D1 and R1 isolate the
The prototype was built on a small
after about seven seconds, pin 6 of IC1c
circuit from any other circuitry (eg, piece of veroboard. This was wrapped
switches low again and Q1 turns off.
a door ajar alarm), while R2, C3 and
in insulation tape and installed in the
A BUZ71A power Mosfet is used
ZD1 filter spikes from the vehicle’s roof lining, next to the interior light.
as the switch to reduce heat dissipa- electrical system that might cause false
D. Harvey,
tion and to ensure that virtually the
triggering or destroy the IC.
Stanthorpe, Qld. $30
+5-15V
100
470k
6.8k
TOUCH
PLATE
0.1
470k
10k
2
IC1a
3 LM324
.0047
1
10k
6
5
IC1b
7
10
Q
D1
1N4148
9
220k
C2
1
10
4
IC1c
11
3.9k
47
33
Touch sensitive switch
uses a single IC
This simple circuit uses one
quad op amp (IC1a-IC1d) and a
few minor components to make
an effective touch sensitive switch.
As shown in the circuit, the
non-inverting inputs of all the op
amps are biased to half the supply
voltage (ie, ½Vcc). At the same
time, the DC bias at the inverting
input of IC1c (pin 9) is considerably
less than this figure. This bias is de-
12
IC1d
14
Q
10k
D2
2.7k
8 13
1N4148
rived from the junction of the 3.9k
and 2.7kΩ resistors and is applied
to pin 9 of IC1c via a 10kΩ resistor
and diode D1.
IC1c is wired as a comparator.
As a result, its pin 8 output is
normally switched high and so
pin 14 of comparator IC1d is normally low.
When a finger is applied to the
touch plate, the increased hash
and hum is greatly amplified by
op amp stages IC1 & IC2. These
two inverting amplifier stages both
function with a gain of 47. The amplified hum signal appears at pin
7 of IC1b and is rectified by D1 &
D2 and filtered by C2.
As a result, the voltage on pin 9
of IC1c now exceeds the bias on pin
10 and so pin 8 of IC1c switches
low. This in turn means that pin 14
of IC1d switches high. This output
can be used to turn on a transistor
to drive a relay or sound a buzzer,
or used directly to switch external
circuitry.
The resistors across D2 & C2 increase the settling rate and make for
cleaner switching. The switching
time is approximately 100µs.
Bill Jolly,
Tranmere, SA. ($30
September 1995 33
SERVICEMAN'S LOG
What’s happened to service backup?
I have a rather mixed bag this month, ranging
from an el cheapo, downmarket TV set to an allsinging, all-dancing, state-of-the-art model with
more bells and whistles than are ever likely to
be used. Neither set was an easy exercise.
The first story concerns a 34cm portable colour TV set made in China and
marketed under the Vision brandname
(model VIS-146R). It is not only a story of technical problems, although it
has its share, but also one of woefully
ineffective backup and support for
imports from this part of Asia. More
on that later.
The technical problem, as described
by the owner, was simply a form of
frame collapse or, as he put it, “after
the set’s been running for a while, a
black band comes down from the top
and up from the bottom.”
Well, there’s nothing new about a
complaint like that. And, while I had
no data of any kind for this set – it
was the first one I had seen – I didn’t
imagine that it would a particularly
difficult fault to fix.
On the bench, the set behaved
exactly as the owner had said. It
performed normally for about 10 or
15 minutes then suddenly went into
the fault condition. Fortunately, even
without a circuit, the vertical system
appeared to be fairly conventional
and based on a 7-pin IC (IC205, a
TA8403K). After taking some voltage
measurements around this IC, in both
the normal and fault conditions, and
checking associated components, I
concluded that the IC was faulty.
Unfortunately, my regular spare
parts supplier did not list this IC, so
I approached another organisation
who were supposed to be the agents
for this set. And this was the first
hurdle. When I identified the set and
nominated the IC type number, I was
promptly informed that that IC was
not fitted in that set.
34 Silicon Chip
And in vain did I emphasise that I
had the set on the bench and the IC
in my hand. “Aw no, it can’t be”, was
the only response I could get. There
followed quite an argument, which
culminated in a grudging offer to investigate and ring me back.
Of course they didn’t and I had to
follow up with several more phone
calls, only to be shoved around from
technician to storeman and back again.
The upshot was that, while tacitly admitting that I had correctly quoted the
number in the set on my bench, they
suggested a substitute unit, LA7830.
And they quoted a price of something
over $20.
I said, “thank you very much; I’ll
let you know”. And there was a very
good reason why I didn’t immediately
place an order. I was familiar with the
LA7830 and I knew that my regular
supplier stocked it. More importantly,
he listed it at about half the quoted
price.
So the replacement IC was duly
acquired and fitted. And that fixed
the fault; the set came good immediately. I gave it a thorough workout for
the next week or so (the owner had
stressed that he was not in a hurry)
and, in view of subsequent events, I
was very glad I did.
During the test week, however, it
didn’t miss a beat, in spite of all the
abuse I could heap upon it. And so it
was duly collected by the owner.
That was the last I heard of it for
the next couple of months. Then the
owner was on the phone with the bad
news; the set had failed again with the
same fault. He was quite reasonable
about it – almost apologetic – but it
was a bit of a shock to have the set
bounce. I asked him to bring it in
immediately.
On the bench, the set did appear to
be exhibiting the same fault – at least
superficially. And it even fooled me
at first. But it wasn’t exactly the same.
I recalled that the original fault had
been quite predictable in its onset; it
would appear every time within 10 or
15 minutes of switch-on.
Not so now. Sometimes the set
would run perfectly for hours, then
suddenly go into fault condition. At
other times it was in fault condition
at switch-on. My suspicions aroused,
I made a check around the previous
culprit, IC205. There were none of the
voltage changes which had lead me to
this component before.
But there was one change, not evident on the previous occasion. The
supply rail to the IC was normally 25V
but now, in fault condition, it dropped
by about 3V. Another IC fault? Not very
likely I felt, since the IC gave no sign
of overheating. So was it a fault in the
power supply, or somewhere along the
line to the IC?
That was probably the explanation
but it was time to call a halt. I wasn’t
prepared to go any further without
some service data – a circuit diagram
at the very least.
A sorry tale
And that brings me to hurdle
number two – and a sorry tale it is.
I approached the aforementioned
agents and asked what they could
provide. The best they could offer
was a circuit diagram. I was prepared
to settle for this and they promised to
send one.
When it didn’t arrived in a reasonable time, I rang them to see what the
problem was. They made some vague
excuses about a shortage but my impression was that they had forgotten
all about it. They promised to chase it
up but it still didn’t arrive and further
phone calls over several weeks pro-
duced further vague excuses.
Finally, after some fairly straight
talking on my part, a circuit arrived.
But – you’ve guessed it – it was the
wrong circuit. In fact, it was nothing
like the set on the bench. It took several
more phone calls (and related excuses)
before the correct circuit turned up –
for what it was worth.
My guess is that it was about a 10th
generation photocopy, made via a couple of pretty grotty copying machines
along the way. It was almost completely unreadable with component
values, type numbers, identification
symbols, voltages (such as there were)
IC pin numbers and any lettering all
just blobs.
The best I could do was try to relate
actual component type numbers or
values with the blobs on the circuit
and see whether they seemed to match.
In most cases, it was guess work more
than anything. And that was all I had
to work with.
Granted, it was better than nothing,
in the sense that I could at least follow
the general circuit trend which all
seemed fairly conventional. Well, that
was something.
Power supply checks
So back to the fault. Following up
the lowered 25V rail clue, I checked
the main HT rail. With the set running normally, it sat at about 120V
but in fault condition, this dropped
to around 93V, although this figure
varied somewhat.
OK, so we had a main power supply
fault. And this fitted in with another
earlier observation. When the vertical
deflection decreased, so did the horizontal scan (though less obviously)
– something that suggested a common
fault.
The power supply appeared to be
quite conventional and very similar
to some used in Samsung sets. And
it used the same common IC, an
STR5404. Well, that was a small plus.
I turned the set on and waited for
the first sign of the fault. When it
appeared, I began prodding around
the board, hoping to get some kind of
a lead. And I did; the board was extremely sensitive, particularly around
the IC. In fact, the IC itself appeared
to be the most sensitive.
My next trick was to try a spot of
freezer on the IC while the set was
in fault condition, taking great care
to keep the freezer off any other
components. Result – an instant
cure. And it worked every time.
I carry this IC in stock and,
with only five pins involved,
it took only a few minutes to fit
a new one. My self-confidence
was shattered immediately at
switch – there was absolutely no
improvement. In fact, I soon established that I could cure the
fault by spraying the new IC or
any component on the board.
I was back to square one.
Well, not quite. All these
observations added up to a
strong suggestion of a dry joint
or a hairline crack in a copper
track.
I pulled the board out again and
went over the copper side with a
magnifying glass. And in spite of a
careful inspection, I could find nothing even vaguely like a faulty joint.
But there had to be a fault in there
somewhere, so I decided on a brute
force approach – go right over the
board and resolder every joint. Yes,
I know, it takes time and may also
dent one’s ego a little but it is often
the most effective approach.
And it certainly was in this case. It
took me about 20 minutes to do the
job – and I could have spent more time
than that just prodding and pondering
– and it cured the fault. And when all
is said and done, that was the purpose
of the exercise.
Another intermittent
Naturally, I gave the set a good
workout over the next few days and
nothing I could do would produce the
fault. But it wasn’t the end of the story.
During this procedure, I became aware
of another fault – also intermittent –
which the owner had apparently not
September 1995 35
of that set or any of it brethren. In fact,
another one turned up a few weeks
later but I had to say “sorry, I can’t
service it”.
And I went on to explain the
problems of obtaining data and other
technical backup. And unless those
concerned can get their act together,
I suspect other servicemen will be
forced to adopt the same attitude.
The snack
Fig.1: the IF and stereo sound decoding circuitry in the Sony KV2764EC.
IC102, which contains the FM detector, is at top left, with L111 between
pins 9 & 10 and L105 and C124 between pins 7 & 8.
noticed and which I hadn’t noticed
either in the confusion associated with
the original fault.
Now that I could watch the screen
in a more relaxed manner, I suddenly
became aware that there was a loss of
blue in the picture from time to time.
The effect could be somewhat subtle
at times, depending on the overall
colour content, but it was definitely
happening.
This part of the circuit is quite
conventional. Three drive transistors
– red, blue and green – on the neck
board feed the three picture tube cathodes and, in turn, are fed from the PAL
decoder IC on the main board.
My first reaction was to suspect the
blue drive transistor. This is a common
type, a BF422, and it was easy enough
to replace it with one from stock. But
no joy, the fault remained.
Next, I checked the voltages, particularly the base voltag
es, around
all three transistors, first while the
set was normal, then when the fault
appeared. Under normal conditions
the reading on all three bases was
about 4V but, in the fault condition,
36 Silicon Chip
this was something less the 2V on the
blue base.
The base of this transistor connects
to a 2.8kΩ trimpot, used for colour
balance adjustment, and from there to
the main board and the PAL decoder
blue output. However, there are two
more components in the line: a small
RF type choke and a 100Ω resistor.
Tracing this line showed the low
voltage at the connection to the main
board but the correct voltage at the
PAL decoder. By then retracing the line
from the decoder, I found the correct
voltage up to and beyond the 100Ω
resistor but not beyond the choke.
I checked the choke’s soldered joints
very carefully but they appeared to
be perfect. Nor could I find anything
wrong with the choke when I pulled it
out and tested it. As a result, I refitted
the choke, this time taking particular
care with the soldering.
And that was it. It took me several
days of constant monitor
ing to be
quite sure but the fault was fixed.
And it has remained fixed for several
months now.
So I hope that is the last I shall see
Well, after all that, a change of pace
is called for. Here are some shorter stories; stories I have been holding back
for some time, due to space problems.
And the first one is something of a
reversal of the usual theme.
One of my common themes is the
fault which looks like a snack but
turns out to be a real stinker. In this
case, it was a strange new fault which
I thought would be a stinker but which
turned to be much easier than I expected, if only by good luck.
It concerns a Sony KV2764EC colour
TV set (PE-3 chassis) and the owner
complained that there was very little
or no sound when operating the VCR,
although there was plenty from the
channels on the TV set. It had started
by being intermittent but was now
permanent.
The set was too heavy for the owner
to carry it in by himself, so we brought
it in together, placed it straight on the
bench, and connected a VCR to it in
the usual manner. In some perverse
way, and in spite of my apprehension,
I was actually looking forward to seeing this fault because it sounded like
a challenge.
When the owner first mentioned
the trouble I had thought he may have
connected the VCR incorrectly to the
audio and video connections of the
21-pin (SCART) socket on the rear. Or
perhaps he suffered from finger trouble
and had pressed the wrong buttons on
the TV set. But he turned out to be an
intelligent bloke, intrigued as much as
I was by the fault.
More importantly, he was fortunate
enough to have two VCRs. So, when
he first noticed the fault, he swapped
them around but to no avail. Then he
tried swapping the video RF output
from Ch1 to Ch0 and retuning the TV
set to it. Still no luck.
Not only was the sound weak when
playing tapes but also when selecting
the stations on the VCR’s own tuner
(sometimes called the EE mode). And,
alter the fault again. I even tried changing the IC, a TDA2546A, but no joy.
I noticed the freezer seemed to have
more effect around the end near L111
and L105, where there also happened
to be a 470pF styro capacitor C124. I
pounced on this because this type of
capacitor has a habit of changing its
characteristics. I gently squeezed and
moved C124 whilst the set was on and
was rewarded by a momentary change
in sound level. That was enough; I
changed it for a new one and the sound
was restored.
I phoned Sony technical support
on another matter and in the course
of the conversation told them about
this fault, only to find that this is a
common one and the styro is now
replaced by the higher grade gold
version! I guess I should have phoned
them first.
Anyway, the customer was as delighted as I was and departed as happy as a sand-boy. But I have to thank
lady luck.
The super Mitsubishi
as I soon discovered, the situation was
no better with my VCR which used an
RF output on UHF Ch37.
Next I tried using the video-in/
audio-in connections via the SCART
socket. Ah-ha, plenty of sound, so it
must be some sort of RF/IF problem.
But why on earth was it discriminating
against VCRs? Didn’t this set like them
or something?
More realistically, what was the
difference between an off-air TV station and a VCR? The shape of the sync
pulses? No – it took a while but the
penny finally dropped.
All our TV chan
nels transmit in
stereo, using the German Zweiton or
two-tone system. But a VCR always
transmits in monaural sound, probably
because it is too expensive to provide
stereo modulation.
So the set was discriminating
between a stereo transmission and
a monaural one and was muting the
latter for some reason. I confirmed
this to some extent with an RF
signal generator but, not having a
stereo generator, I tried attenuating
a TV channel until the stereo light
went out, which dropped the sound
simultaneously.
But where was the fault? Was it in
the tuner, IF, stereo decoder, or audio
logic circuits? Fortunately, all these
areas, except the last, are located on
board “A”. I decided to start working
from the decoder and move out from
there. The two intercarrier signals at
5.5MHz and 5.74MHz are fed into
IC151 and IC152 where they are decoded.
I began by measuring the voltages
around these ICs and found them
close to those shown on the circuit.
But I was getting a gut feeling that I
should concentrate on the 5.5MHz
signal which is the usual monaural
signal (L+R) rather than the 5.74MHz
signal (2R), used for stereo only. This
focused my suspicion to IC102 which
contains the FM detector.
I decided to hit the components in
this area with the hot and cold treatment, on the off-chance of a clue. I
was lucky – the freezer momentarily
brought the sound up but it quickly
disappeared and heating or freezing
the components around the IC didn’t
It wasn’t much later when I encountered a similar fault to this involving a
Mitsubishi CT-2553EST, fitted with an
E4-Z chassis (very similar to the AS2M chassis). This is one of the newer
generation, all bells and whistles,
super-deluxe models, boasting just
about every feature you can think of,
including a multi-standards facility
(PAL, NTSC and SECAM).
It’s is all very clever but I do wonder
how often these features are used, or
even understood, by the average person. Of course, it makes for a beaut
sales pitch but it means a higher price
tag and, more to the point, much greater complexity when trying to service
the monster.
And so it was in this case. A major
problem in this set is access; trying to
take measurements on the main board
and the modules while the set is on
is a very dodgy procedure. The leads
are very tightly dressed in a wiring
loom, preventing the board from being easily inverted, while the plug-in
modules are just too close together for
examination. And to unplug them is a
major operation!
Anyway, the complaint amounted
to intermittent loss of luminance; ie,
a ghostly, over-saturated, dark picture.
It was clearly a job for the CRO and we
started from pin 10, video out, of the
VIF pack, IP1A1, on the main board,
September 1995 37
Fig.2: a corroded track in the 12V supply line to transistor Q254 caused the original loss of sound in the
Mitsubishi CT2553EST. Note that the 12V rail comes in on pin 3 of socket VC2 at lower right.
PCB-MAIN. There was nothing wrong
here, the CRO showing a very clean
composite waveform. OK, but which
way next?
What follows from here is a bewildering maze of video switching
circuits but I managed to trace it, eventually, to PCB-Y/C-SW, via plug/socket
VS3, thence through transistors Q2P1
and Q2P2, IC2P1 and Q2P3. From here,
despite many blind alleys, I traced the
signal to PCB-VC/RGB-CTI via plug/
socket YS1 and thence to the emitter
of Q254, where the trail became cold,
or rather distorted.
The collector voltage of Q254,
shown as 11.9V, was very low. This
is derived from a 12V rail coming in
on plug/socket VC2-3 and which was
correct at that point. I was getting
close. To cut a long story short, after
much bad temper, due to the awkward
access to this module, I traced the
12V copper track around the edge of
the board.
Near the top, it disappeared under
that horrible brown glue which I have
mentioned in these notes in the past
and which the Japanese are so fond of
using to anchor parts. Hasn’t anyone
ever told them – or don’t they listen?
I’m still finding this glue in near new
sets.
Anyway, as usual, the glue had hardened, changed colour (darkened) and
corroded the copper track, changing
it, effectively, into a high value resistor. I linked the break and 12V was
restored, along with the luminance.
It all sounds so simple but it meant
taking the module out, measuring
and working on it, and replacing it a
number of times. This was a very slow
and wearisome process .
And that should have been the end
of the story. Unfortunately, after reinstallation at its home with its VCR,
it bounced. Yes, you’ve guessed it;
intermittent no sound, or rather very
little sound, from the VCR.
Unfortunately, I sensed that the
owner wasn’t very happy. He didn’t
say much; it was rather what he didn’t
say that alerted me. It was obviously a
different fault, for which I was not to
blame, but it was too difficult to argue
at that stage.
Fig.3: the TU1A1 U/V TUNER and IP1A1 VIF-PACK are only available as a combined pair in the Mitsubishi
CT2553EST. The VIF-PACK is prone to dry joints around the filters, coils and the SAW filter.
38 Silicon Chip
I confirmed it was OK through
the audio/video sockets and I was
half-tempted just to supply suitable
leads and leave it at that (no, not seriously)! But my reputation was at stake.
Since I was – apparently – the one who
had wrecked a beloved set, I had to be
sure I “fixed it proper”!
As with the Sony, I started at the
decoder, located on the PCB-SOUND
board, and went straight to IC3001, a
TDA3803A. I have had a lot of trouble
with the TDA3800G which was used
widely on earlier models, especially
JVC. But changing this made no dif
ference and I moved to IC3000 and
its associated circuitry. I examined
this very carefully, particularly capacitor C3002, which plays a similar
role to C124 in the Sony circuit.
But everything checked out OK and
wouldn’t succumb to the hot and cold
treatment.
The next major suspect was the previously mentioned VIF-PACK IP1A1.
I have had a lot of trouble with this
module over the years, including a
variety of intermittent faults, mainly
video, and everything from no picture
to patterning, or snow on UHF only.
And you cannot purchase a new
module by itself. Instead, it is part
of a (very expensive) matched pair
consisting of Tuner TU1A1 and VIFPACK IP1A1. I unsoldered the module
and examined it. Normally, it is very
prone to dry joints everywhere but
more so around the filters, coils and
the SAW filter.
But this set had already been worked
over so I reinstalled it with the covers
off. I switched the set on and tried
freezing the ceramic filters, something
that is not usually recommended as it
can sometimes damage them. In this
case it made no difference.
I then tried a trick I learned from a
colleague some time ago; running a
moist finger over the circuit. (Don’t
try this trick unless you’re very sure
you know what you’re doing; par
ticularly on a live chassis!) It was
his extension of the traditional bash
and prod, wobble and twist, hot and
cold techniques, often needed as a
last resort to pinpoint a difficult
fault – particularly one involving
a change in a characteristic, rather
than a clean cut failure.
I had tried it a couple of times
before without any luck. But this
time it worked. I noticed a change
in the sound level
when touching around the 5.5MHz
ceramic filters X3 & X4. The module
was removed again and two new
filters fitted. And that was it; sweet
success – the sound level was back
to normal.
Apparently, one of the filters was
faulty and off frequen
cy. My finger
on the board pattern was re-tuning it
slightly. Once again I was lucky.
And, hopefully, my reputation had
SC
been restored.
Especially For Model
Railway Enthusiasts
Includes 14 projects for model railway layouts, including throttle controllers,
sound simulators (diesel & steam) & a level crossing detector. Price: $7.95
plus $3 for postage. Order today by phoning (02) 9979 5644 & quoting your
credit card number; or fax the details to (02) 9979 6503; or send cheque,
money order or credit card details to: Silicon Chip Publications, PO Box 139,
Collaroy, NSW 2097.
September 1995 39
Rail p
A Walk-A
40 Silicon Chip
power MkII:
Around Throttle For
Model Railways
Want to build a walk-around throttle for your
model railway? This completely new design offers
all the features you could want, including pulse
power, pushbutton control, track voltage metering,
inertia (momentum) and full overload protection.
By RICK WALTERS
September 1995 41
S
MAIN FEATURE
piece.
tions on the hand
nc
fu
l
al
ith
w
l
• Walkaround contro
eed operation.
d reliable low sp
an
th
oo
sm
r
fo
d regu• Pulse power
r excellent spee
fo
F
M
-E
ck
ba
or
• Monitoring of mot
n.
d the
latio
as though it ha untts
ac
el
od
m
entum) so
hed off for sh
• Inertia (mom
ertia can be switc
in
n;
ai
tr
al
re
a
weight of
dible
ing.
g visible and au
in
ud
cl
in
n,
tio
ec
• Full overlo. ad prot
rs
indicato
g thrown into
events train bein
pr
t;
ou
ck
lo
e
rs
op.
• Forward/reve
st comes to a st
reverse until it fir
or ultimate
s current speed e pressed.
te
ca
di
in
g;
in
er
met
wer buttons ar
• Track voltattge
hen Faster or Slo
w
g
in
se
d
ee
sp
THE RAILPOWER MKII incorporates
all the features of our very popular
Railpower design featured in April
& May 1988. While the original Rail
power is still a valid design, the MkII
version has a lot of new features. In
spite of the extra functions, the new
design uses less parts and is easier to
build. How can that be? Just read on.
The outstanding feature of our
previous Railpower design was the
use of pulse power and simulated
inertia, allowing the train to move
off from rest at a very low speed and
accelerate very gradually, which looks
very realistic.
Another big feature is the concept
of a walk-around throttle. This has
all the functions on a hand
control and allows
you to follow your
train all around the
layout. Nor do you need a long cable
which will get tangled up as you
move around. You can have a number of sockets around the layout and
you can plug into whichever socket
is handy. And when you unplug the
hand control in order to move it to
another socket, the train carries on at
its exact same speed setting, without
any disruption.
Hand control
The hand control of the
Railpower MkII features
a small meter
and six
pushbutt ons.
These are labelled
Faster, Slower, Forward,
Reverse, Inertia and Stop. The
latter four buttons have LED indicators
to show the selected functions.
42 Silicon Chip
The Forward and Reverse buttons
are interlocked. If the train is moving
forward and the Reverse button is
pressed, the Railpower will switch to
Stop, the Stop LED will light and the
train will slow to a stop. The controller
will then switch to Reverse and the
Reverse LED will be lit.
A similar sequence occurs if the
Forward button is pressed while the
train is travelling in the reverse direction. This overcomes a drawback
of the original design and all other
controllers that we know of – if you
mistakenly throw a train into reverse
while it is moving at a reasonable
speed, it will be derailed.
The Stop button, when pressed,
will bring the train to a realistic but
reasonably rapid halt. The braking
time is adjusted by the “brake” trimpot
(VR2) on the main PC board.
If you are shunting wagons, the inertia function can be a hindrance. Hence,
it can be switched out, by pushing the
Inertia button, if the train is stopped or
running at a low speed. Once switched
out, Inertia can be switched back in
at any time.
Railpower controller
Apart from the hand control, the
Railpower MkII consists of a plast i c
case containing a PC
board which has
all the com
ponents mount
ed on it. There is
no transformer as we
have assumed that the typical model railway enthusiast
already has a self-contained power
supply which can be hooked up to the
Railpower. We’ll talk more about this
aspect when we discuss construction.
The front panel of the Railpower
is bare except for six LEDs. These
echo the LEDs on the hand control
and add two others, one for Power
and the other to indicate Overload
(short circuit).
+5V
5
M1
500uA
450W
2
çç
3
10
10k
METER
ZERO
VR1
5k
560
16
4.7k
15
4.7k
7
14
13
6x1N914
8
D3
0.1
D6
STOP
S6
12
A
B
O0
IC1
74HC42
C
O2
D
O3
8
4
O1
1
K
2
3
4
LED1
RED
K
A
K
A
K
A
A
LED4
ORANGE
LED2
GREEN
LED3
YELLOW
gradually increases (assuming
that the inertia setting is large)
the meter reading will increase
to reflect this.
If the Faster or Slower button
is pressed, the meter will momentarily indicate the previous
selected speed setting and then
move up or down to show the
new setting. The new speed
setting is only indicated while
the buttons are actually being
pressed.
Micro-speak for modellers
REVERSE
S3
For many readers and railway
modellers, this might be the first
time you have come “face to face”
6
with a microprocessor. Never
INERTIA
FORW'D
K
D2
D4
A
S5
S4
fear, it’s just a smarter IC than
those you may have used before
DECEL
ACCEL
but otherwise it’s just another
S2
S1
1
black inscrutable chip.
In essence, this Z8 micro is
8-PIN
RAILPOWER MKII HAND CONTROL
DIN PLUG
only a bunch of counters and
gates, crammed into an 18-pin
Fig.1: the hand controller circuit is based on IC1, a 74HC42 BCD decoder. This chip
is used to indicate four modes of operation (via LEDs1-4) with only two lines from
IC package. The big advantage is
the microprocessor. The meter indicates both the track voltage and the selected
that we can control the logic in
speed setting when the faster or slower buttons are being pressed.
a manner which suits each par
ticular application. While there
On the PC board, there are four
halt much more quickly and the time are only a few leads to and from the
trimpot adjustments: for maximum it takes is set by the brake adjustment processor, inside the chip we can have
speed, minimum speed, inertia and
trimpot.
the equivalent of 50 or 60 gates and
brake. The maximum speed setting is
perhaps five counters interconnected.
Low-cost microprocessor
usually set to give the maximum rated
These might give an output on just
voltage for the particular locomotive.
one pin, should a certain sequence of
The design brief for the Railpower
Typically, this is 12V DC for HO scale
events occur.
MkII was that it had to be easier to
models but it can be lower for other
Just as we use standard ICs (hardbuild than the previous version, it
scales such as N or Z. The minimum had to have more features and it had ware) and interconnect them to obtain
speed setting is determined by the
to have all pushbutton operation. the circuit functions we require, a simquality of the locomotive’s motor. Very
To achieve this, we have designed a ilar design process is carried out when
good models may start to move with
completely new circuit which uses using a microprocessor. The difference
less than 1V across the track while oth- a low-cost microprocessor, the Zilog in this case is that the design relies on a
ers may need 4V or more before they
Z86E08. Now don’t be scared off be- set of instructions (software) stored in
start moving. By setting the minimum
cause the circuit uses a microproces- the internal ROM (read only memory)
speed just below the point where the
of the micro.
sor. Have a read of the section headed
loco starts to move, more realistic and “Micro-speak for modellers” and be
Thus, each time we use the microresponsive operation is obtained.
processor in a different project, we
reassured.
The inertia setting controls the
store a different sequence of instrucThe Z86E08 (Z8, for short) comes
time the train takes to accelerate to in an 18-pin package and contains tions in its ROM.
maximum speed. This adjustment
Before we go further, we should
2Kb bytes of OTP (one time programranges from zero to four minutes.
mable) memory. Two pins are for V+ explain the pin descriptions for the
At the maximum setting, a loco may and ground and two pins are for the microprocessor (IC1). It has three
take more than one scale mile before crystal, while the remaining 14 pins
groups of pins, called ports in computit reaches its selected speed, just like are all available for control functions. er jargon. These are port 0, port 2 and
a real train.
port 3, abbreviated to P0, P2 and P3.
Using the processor allows us to
Inertia applies to deceleration as carry out complex tasks which would
P0 has three I/O pins (input/output),
well as acceleration so a train will take
P2 has eight and P3 has three.
otherwise require lots of conventional
approximately the same time to come
Thus, pin 15 which is labelled P20
circuitry. The best example of this is
to a stop as it took to reach its selected
the meter in the hand control. During is Port 2 line zero (computer people
speed setting.
normal running, it indicates the speed, start counting from zero, not one like
On the other hand, if you push the
normal mortals). We have assigned
from zero to 100%, at which the train
Stop button, the train will come to a is actually travelling. As the speed this pin to be the one that turns the
D1
D5
September 1995 43
44 Silicon Chip
8-PIN
DIN
SOCKET
1
7
3
2
6
4
8
5
12
13
14
D
C
B
A
10
680W
.047
22k
METER
SPEED
MAX
VR5 5k
10k
MIN
VR4
5k
MAX
VR3
5k
16
8
O3
O2
O1
O0
4
3
2
1
K
K
A
A
A
470
12
12
13
5
6
15
16
22pF
22pF
X1
10MHz
+5V
INH VEE VSS
6
8
7
OUT/IN 3
IC4
A 11
4051
B 10
C 9
+5V
ZD1
3.9V
12VAC
INPUT
74HC11
14
2
12
IC3a
13
1
BACK EMF
16
VDD
4.7k
LED2
GREEN
LED3
YELLOW
3
13 0
15
2
14 1
LED4
ORANGE
K
A
K
LED1
RED
BRAKE
VR2
5k
PO1
PO2
X1
X2
P20
P21
9
P32
P31
8 180k
0.1
IC1
Z86E08
5
VCC
10 P33
GND
14
17 P22
18
P23
11
PO0
4 P27
P24
2 P25
3 P26
MODE INDICATION
INERTIA
VR1
5k
10k
IC2
74HC42
D3
1N914
15
0.1
10k
Q10
BC338
D2
1N914
D4-D7
4x1N5404
+5V
E
C
2200
C
10
5V
10k B
E
C
B
0.1
+5V
BUZZER
+5V
0.1
10k
E
Q6
BD649 C
B
C
Q2
BD650 E
1k B
Q12
BC328
470
C
E
LED5
GREEN
22
Q9
BC338
E
Q5
BC338 C
1.8k B
CURRENT
MONITOR
10k
22k
10k
6
OUT
7
IC3b
IN914
10k B
REG1
7805
B
GND
IN
+17V
E
C
LED6
RED
560
4
3
5
8
470
D1
IC3c
RAILPOWER MKII
2200
Q11
BC338
B 22k
10k
9
10
11
Q1
BC338
10k
E
B
C
B
PLASTIC
SIDE
E
C
VIEWED FROM
BELOW
E
B 1k
Q8
C BD649
B
C
0.1
10k
MOTOR
Q4
BD650
E
E
C
E
C
Q7
BC338
B 2.2k
A
B 10k
Q3
BC338
K
I GO
+17V
power to the track on and off. We did
not have to use this pin; we could have
used any pin on P2, or for that matter,
P0. We could not use P3 as the pins on
this port connect to two comparators,
which are used to convert the analog
voltages from preset potentiometers
VR1-VR4 to digital values, which can
be used by the processor. Enough on
micros, let’s get back to the main story.
Hand control circuit
The hand control consists of six
pushbuttons, four LEDs, one IC (integrated circuit) and a few resistors,
diodes and capacitors mounted on a
small PC board measuring 74 x 50mm.
The hand control connects to the Railpower via a 9-core cable (one unused)
and an 8pin DIN plug. The circuit is
shown in Fig.1.
Supply rails of 5V and 0V are fed
via pins 5 and 1 on the DIN connector
to IC1, a 74HC42 BCD (binary coded
decimal) decoder. Four outputs from
IC1 are used to drive the four LEDs. It
was necessary to use the IC as there
were insufficient outputs available
on the microprocessor. By using the
74HC42, the microprocessor only
needs two lines to control four LEDs.
Again, due to limited processor
outputs and only eight pins on the
connector, the six pushbuttons are
accessed by three lines. We do this
by using diodes D1-D6 which are
connected in a simple matrix, allowing
each button to pull one or two lines
to 0V. As each line, or pair of lines, is
connected to ground, it signals to the
microprocessor the function required.
Main board
The main PC board contains four
ICs, a 7805 regulator, 12 transistors,
five trimpots and a handful of small
components, mounted on a PC board
measuring 143.5 x 108mm. The circuit
is shown in Fig.2. Note the eight lines
of the DIN socket. These connect to the
hand control circuit of Fig.1.
The best way to explain the circuit
Fig.2 (left): IC1, the microprocessor,
controls all facets of circuit operation.
As well as driving the H-bridge
circuit (Q1-Q8), it reads the buttons
in the hand control, the settings of the
trimpots (VR1-VR4) via IC4, the backEMF and the load current. As well, it
drives the mode indicator (IC2) and
the meter.
Q1
BC338
10k B
+17V
Q2
BD650 E
1k B
C
E
Q4
BD650
C
B 1k
C
C
MOTOR
E
IC3, Q9
Q5
BC338 C
1.8k B
E
Q3
BC338
B 10k
E
10k
Q6
BD649 C
B
10k
Q8
C BD649
B
E
C
Q7
BC338
B 2.2k
E
E
0.1
Fig.3: the H-bridge circuit. This controls the speed of the motor (depending
on the pulse width), as well as its direction. For example, to make the
motor go forward, Q8 is turned on continuously while Q2 is pulsed on and
off. For reverse, Q6 is turned on continuously and Q4 is pulsed on and off.
is to go through the microprocessor
start-up sequence. When power is first
applied, the Z86E08 microprocessor
executes a series of steps. First, it
sets pin 15 low; ie, to 0V. This pin
applies power to the track when it is
high (+5V). Pin 16 is taken high to set
the train direction to forward (low
for reverse). Pins 17 and 18 are both
taken low, which via IC2, another
74HC42 BCD decoder, illuminates
the Stop LED. The same lines go to
IC1 in the hand control to illuminate
its Stop LED.
It then takes pins 12 and 13, which
control the output of IC4, low. IC4, a
74C4051 8-input analog multiplexer,
is simply a switch which can route any
one of eight inputs to its output (pin 3).
With pins 10 and 11 low, the wiper of
the maximum speed trimpot, VR3, is
connected via IC4’s output to pin 9 of
IC1. The microprocessor converts the
voltage on the wiper to a digital value
which it stores. Pins 12 and 13 of IC1
are taken high and low in sequence
and the voltages from trimpots VR1,
VR2 & VR4 are subsequently read and
stored.
IC1 has now finished its “power on
routine” and is ready to look at the
hand control, to see if a button has
been pressed.
motor drive circuit which is known
as an “H-bridge”. This consists of four
Darlington transistors – Q2, Q4, Q6 &
Q8 – and these are driven by buffer
transistors Q1, Q3, Q5 & Q7. To explain
this part of the circuit better, we have
reproduced it in Fig.3.
The H-bridge circuit does two
things. First, it switches the power
on and off to the motor. The rate of
switching is 150Hz and the voltage fed
to the motor is directly proportional
to the width of the pulses. Second,
the H-bridge allows the direction of
the motor to be reversed, depending
on which transistors are actually
turned on.
In this case, to make the motor go
forward, Q8 is turned on continuously
while Q2 is pulsed on and off. Q4 & Q7
are turned off. To make the motor go
in reverse, Q2 & Q8 are turned off, Q6
is turned on continuously and Q4 is
pulsed on and off. Transistors Q1 & Q3
ensure that the Darlington transistors
Q2 & Q4 turn on hard (ie,
saturate) so that their
power dissipation
H-bridge motor drive
Before we discuss this
operation, let’s look at the
September 1995 45
Myths & Magic of Pulse Power
Pulse power as used in the
Railpower Mk I & MkII circuits is
quite different to that used in some
commercial train controllers. In the
Railpower, the voltage is applied to
the track in pulse form at 150Hz.
At low speeds, the pulses are very
short and high speeds, the pulses
are much longer. This is very similar
to the system used in switch-mode
power supplies and is highly efficient. However, the reason we use
this pulse power system is to get
more reliable running. Because the
peak voltage applied to the track is
about 17 to 18V at all speed settings,
it is much more effective at overcoming resistance due to dirty track, dirty
motor brushes and commutators.
The result is really good slow speed
operation which means that your
trains will look much more realistic.
It’s magic.
On the other hand, some modelling enthusiasts believe that pulse
power can make motors run hot and
can even burn them out. This is not
true and there are a number of factors which ensure that pulse power
does not damage model locomotive
motors.
First, virtually all motors used in
model locomotives are permanent
is minimal and small heatsinks can
suffice. More importantly, Q1 & Q3
perform voltage translation of the 5V
logic signals to Q2 & Q4 which have
a supply voltage of +17V. Q5 & Q7 ensure that their respective Darlingtons,
Q6 & Q8, turn on fully.
Having described how the H-bridge
works, we can now see how it is controlled by the micro, IC1.
As we stated previously, to select
the forward direction, pin 16 of IC1
goes high, taking pins 1, 2 & 13 of AND
gate IC3a high. IC3a is used simply as
a non-inverting buffer, so its output at
pin 12 is also high and thus Q7 & Q8
are turned on.
The output of IC3a also turns on Q9
which pulls its collector to 0V. This
will turn Q5, and thus Q6, off. Pin 15
of IC1 is the pulse drive (150Hz) signal
and this is fed via AND gate IC3c to
turn on Q1 & Q2. Q9 also pulls pin
46 Silicon Chip
magnet or series wound motors. In
both types, the torque generated is
proportional to the average current
through the windings while the heating effect is proportional to the RMS
value of the current. Now because
we are using pulse power and the
RMS voltage will be slightly higher
than the average value, particularly
at low speed settings, then it might
be supposed that the motor’s winding would get hotter than if pure DC
was applied.
In practice though, two things
come to the rescue. First, the motor’s inductance tends to reduce
the current drain when the speed
settings are low, due to the very
narrow applied pulses. Second, because the narrow pulses are actually
much more effective in making the
motor rotate and thus moving the
locomotive forward, the motor then
generates more back-EMF than it
otherwise would with a low value of
DC and thus the current is actually
reduced. So in practice, the difference in motor dissipation between
the unfiltered DC of most controllers
and the pulsed DC of the Railpower
is negligible.
The big danger of motors burning
out is if the motor stalls due to a bind-
5 of IC3b low, via diode D1, and this
means that output pin 6 will be low,
turning off Q3 & Q4. To reverse the
motor, pin 16 of IC1 goes low, so pin
12 of IC3a is low, turning off Q7, Q8
& Q9. This allows Q5 & Q6 to turn on
and the pulse signal from pin 15 of IC1
passes via IC3b to Q3 & Q4.
Overload protection
Note that the emitters of Q6 & Q8
are connected via a common 0.1Ω
resistor to the 0V line. This resistor is
used to monitor the current supplied
to the track. If there is a short circuit
across the track, the voltage across this
resistor will increase. This voltage is
applied to transistor Q11.
If the voltage across the resistor rises
above 0.6V, Q11 turns on, lighting LED
6 (overload indicator) and also turning
on Q12, which drives the buzzer to
give an audible indication of the short.
ing gear system. This risk applies to
any model train controller, not just
the Railpower.
Pulsed DC is also reputed to
cause more motor noise than with
pure DC. This tends to be true,
partly because the Railpower allows
the loco to run at a much lower
speed than would be possible with
unfiltered or pure DC across the
track. At these much lower speeds,
the motor noise is more significant;
at higher speeds, the motor noise
is drowned out by gear noise and
wheel/rail noise.
Motor noise is also dependent on
the quality of the gear systems and
it can be amplified by locos of brass
construction. Overall though, pulsed
DC as used in the Railpower gives
significantly better running, greater
realism and more reliable operation.
However, coreless motors, such
as those branded Portescap or
Escap, should not be used with
pulsed DC as they have very little
inductance and generate very low
back-EMF. These motors should
only be used with pure DC train
controllers. However, these motors
are not generally used in model
locomotives and so will rarely be
encountered.
Not only do we get a visible and
audible indication of the short but the
system goes further and shuts down
the voltage on the track, so that no
damage can occur. This happens in
the following way.
As pins 4 & 9 of IC3 are connected
to Q11’s collector, they will also be
pulled low when Q11 turns on. This
will turn off the power to the motor,
whether it is running forwards or is
in reverse. As there is now no voltage
applied to it, there can be no current
flow through the resistor and consequently Q11 will turn off. Power will
be re-applied and the whole sequence
will repeat until the short circuit is
removed.
We have previously stated in the
description that pin 15 of IC1 goes
high to run the motor. Actually pin 15
goes high every 6.5 milliseconds, for a
time dependent on the adjustment of
VR4, the minimum speed setting. If the
operator presses the Faster button on
the controller, the pulses from pin 15
are longer, effectively putting a higher
voltage on the track.
Similarly if the Slower button is
pressed, pin 15’s pulse output will
become shorter, reducing the average
track voltage.
Speed regulator & back-EMF
As a model train comes to a gradient,
it will tend to slow down, the speed
reduction being dependent upon the
motor’s power and the slope. In severe
situations, the train might even stop
and this is not very realistic.
Our circuit compensates for the
extra load on the motor by increasing
the voltage to the track so that the
speed setting is maintained more or
less constant. How is this done? By
measuring the back-EMF of the motor
and using it to control the micro, is the
quick answer.
All electric motors generate a “backEMF” which is the voltage which opposes current flow through the motor
windings. If the motor speed is high,
the back-EMF is high and current
will be low. If the motor is stalled, the
back-EMF will be close to zero and
the current will be very high. So how
do we measure the motor’s back-EMF
while it is running? It turns out that
this pulse power system makes it fairly
easy and we measure the back-EMF in
the periods when the voltage applied
to the track is zero; ie, between each
pulse on pin 15.
We monitor the motor’s back-EMF
by means of the 10kΩ resistors connected to either side of the motor.
While one side of the motor is always
close to 0V (depending on whether
Q6 or Q8 is off), the opposite side
will always have the track voltage
applied to it and thus one or other of
the 10kΩ resistors will feed the voltage
to the collector of Q10, then through
D2 and the 180kΩ resistor to pin 8 of
IC1. The capacitor on this pin filters
this voltage.
Now the trick is to make sure that
the voltage fed back to IC1 is the backEMF and not the track voltage. This is
done by turning on transistor Q10 via
the pulse line, pin 15, of IC1. Thus,
each time a pulse appears on the track,
Q10 is turned on to short the anode of
D2 to the 0V line.
Hence, the signal applied via D2 to
pin 8 is a sample of the motor-back
PARTS LIST
HAND CONTROL
1 PC board, code 09109952, 74
x 50mm
1 plastic case, (Jaycar HB-6032
or equivalent)
1 8 pin DIN plug (Jaycar PP0312 or equivalent)
1 500uA FSD edge reading
meter (DSE Q-2110 or equivalent)
2 yellow PC mount momentary
switches (Jaycar SP-0722 or
equivalent)
1 red PC mount momentary
switches (Jaycar SP-0720 or
equivalent)
1 black PC mount momentary
switch (Jaycar SP-0721 or
equivalent)
1 white PC mount momentary
switch (Jaycar SP-0723 or
equivalent)
1 green PC mount momentary
switch (Jaycar SP-0724 or
equivalent)
1 5kΩ horizontal trimpot (VR1)
Semiconductors
1 74HC42 BCD decoder (IC1)
6 1N914 signal diodes (D1-D6)
1 3mm red LED (LED1)
1 3mm green LED (LED2)
1 3mm yellow LED (LED3)
1 3mm orange LED (LED4)
Capacitors
1 10µF 50VW electrolytic
1 0.1µF monolithic
Resistors (0.25W, 1%)
1 10kΩ
1 560Ω
2 4.7kΩ
Miscellaneous
1 cable clamp, Jaycar HP-0718
or equivalent
1 12mm x 2.5mm countersunk
screw
1 2.5mm nut
2 #8 x 10mm self tapping screws
1 8mm untapped spacer
2 5mm untapped spacers
MAIN BOARD
1 PC board code 09109951,
143.5 x 108mm
1 plastic case, 140 x 110 x
35mm (Jaycar HB-5970 or
equivalent)
1 8 pin chassis mounting DIN
socket (Jaycar PS-0360 or
equivalent)
1 10MHz crystal
1 PC board mounting buzzer
(Jaycar HB-3458 or equivalent)
2 TO-220 heatsinks
5 5kΩ horizontal trimpots (VR1VR5)
3 metres 9-way cable (Jaycar
WB-1578 or equivalent)
4 PC stakes
Semiconductors
1 Z86E08 programmed OTP
microprocessor (IC1)
1 74HC42 BCD decoder (IC2)
1 74HC11 triple AND gate (IC3)
1 74HC4051 or 4051B analog
multiplexer (IC4)
1 7805 +5V regulator (REG1)
2 BD650 PNP Darlington transistors (Q2,Q4)
2 BD649 NPN Darlington transistors (Q6,Q8)
7 BC338 NPN transistors
(Q1,Q3,Q5,Q7,Q9-Q11)
1 BC328 PNP transistor (Q12)
1 3.9V 500mW zener diode
(ZD1)
3 1N914, 1N4148 signal diodes
(D1-D3)
4 1N5404 rectifier diodes (D4D7)
2 5mm red LEDs (LED1,6)
2 5mm green LEDs (LED2,5)
1 5mm yellow LED (LED3)
1 5mm orange LED (LED4)
Capacitors
2 2200µF 25VW electrolytic
1 22µF 16VW electrolytic
2 10µF 50VW electrolytic
4 0.1µF monolithic
1 .047µF MKT polyester
2 22pF NPO ceramic
Resistors (0.25W, 1%)
1 180kΩ
2 1kΩ
3 22kΩ
1 680Ω
12 10kΩ
1 560Ω
1 4.7kΩ
3 470Ω
1 2.2kΩ
1 0.1Ω 5W
1 1.8kΩ
Miscellaneous
Solder, hook-up wire, plastic
cable ties.
September 1995 47
Although the circuit of the Railpower MkII is quite complicated, the PC board is
relatively simple and has very little wiring.
EMF, not the track voltage. The voltage
at pin 8 is filtered by the 0.1µF capacitor, so that commutator hash does not
give false readings.
This voltage at pin 8 is compared
with the desired setting and if the
value starts to drop, due to the train
slowing or the load increasing, the
microprocessor increases the track
voltage, to keep the loco running at a
constant speed.
Maximum speed setting
Previously, we discussed VR3,
the maximum speed adjustment,
and described how it is used to set
the maximum track voltage, to suit
the locomotives being used. We also
discussed the meter which has two
modes, one to indicate the actual track
voltage and the other, to indicate the
track voltage being set by the Faster
and Slower buttons.
The meter is driven directly from
48 Silicon Chip
pin 4 of the microprocessor, via trimpot VR5.
During the setup procedure, trimpot
VR3 is used to set the maximum track
voltage and then VR5 is used to set the
meter’s pointer to full scale, to give a
100% reading. In the same procedure,
trimpot VR4 is used to set the minimum track voltage and trimpot VR1,
in the hand control, is used to set the
meter to zero.
In practice, it will be necessary to
do the adjustments for the various
trimpots more than once, before they
are correct.
A 10MHz crystal is used by the
microprocessor and is con
n ected
between pins 6 & 7, along with two
22pF capacitors to ensure the crystal
oscillates reliably.
Power supply
No power transformer is included in
the circuit as it is assumed that mod-
elling enthusiasts will already have a
suitable controller power supply or a
12V battery charger.
As presented, the circuit can deliver peak currents of about 6A, which
corresponds to a maximum output of
about 4A continuous. A 12V charger
rated for at least 4A or a 12V power
transformer with a rating of 60VA is
recommended.
Unfiltered DC from the external 12V
battery charger or AC from an external
12V power transformer is applied to
a bridge rectifier consisting of diodes
D4-D7.
These rectify the input and their
output is filtered with two 2200µF
capacitors to give unregulated DC
of about +17V and this is the motor
supply, applied to the emitters of Q2
& Q3. The +17V rail is also applied to
the 7805 5V regulator which supplies
all the other circuitry in the Railpower.
Next month, we will complete the
description of the Rail
power MkII,
giving all the construction details and
setting up procedure.
SC
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.jaycar.com.au
September 1995 49
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.jaycar.com.au
50 Silicon Chip
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.jaycar.com.au
September 1995 51
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.jaycar.com.au
52 Silicon Chip
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.jaycar.com.au
September 1995 53
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.jaycar.com.au
54 Silicon Chip
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.jaycar.com.au
September 1995 55
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.jaycar.com.au
56 Silicon Chip
COMPUTER BITS
BY GREG SWAIN
Running MemMaker &
avoiding memory conf licts
Having trouble with General Protection Faults in
Windows? Try running the MemMaker memory
optimisation program. This will sometimes
overcome the problem and your programs will
run more efficiently too.
I remember seeing a movie some
time ago – a Western actually – in
which someone gets shot. “Who would
want to shoot Bad Bart?”, queried a
bystander after the bullets had stopped
flying and everyone had crawled
out from behind the bar. “Just about
everyone who ever knew him”, came
the reply.
What’s this got to computers and
memory? Well, in this case, the question is “Who’s encountered a General
Protection Fault when running Windows?” Answer: “just about everyone
who’s ever used it”.
OK, so it’s a bad analogy but you get
the general idea – General Protection
Faults in Windows are not uncommon. There you are working away
happily, running lots of applications,
when all of sudden up comes an error
message. Often, it will read something
like this: Progman caused a General
Protection Fault in module Filename
at 0001:0296.
Now isn’t that helpful? What this
means in plain English is that your
Windows application has written
to a memory space that was already
occupied, clobbering another module
(or file) in the process. As a result,
the system becomes unstable and the
wisest course is usually to exit all applications and reboot Windows.
Now there are lots of reasons why
GP faults can occur, including incompatible terminate-and-stay-resident
programs (TSRs) or device drivers in
your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.
BAT files. In that case, you can often
troubleshoot the problem by removing
these TSRs – just type “REM: in front
of the appropriate entries.
If that solves the problem, you can
then proceed to replace the lines one
by one until the problem reappears.
When it does, you’ll know which one
is causing the GP fault.
Often, however, GP faults are caused
by other memory management problems. If you consistently get the same
error message when a certain function
is performed, then running MemMaker
may overcome (or at least minimise)
the problem.
EXTENDED
MEMORY
1024K
FFFF
UPPER MEMORY
AREA
384K
640K
A000
CONVENTIONAL
MEMORY
AREA
640K
Computer memory
Before we take a look at the Mem
Maker program, let’s first briefly look
at how memory is organised in a PC.
Fig.1 shows the memory configuration of a typical computer. The
first 640Kb is called “conventional”
memory and is used by all MS-DOS
programs. Above that but below 1Mb
is a 384Kb block called the “upper
memory area”. This block is normally
reserved for use by hardware expansion cards, such as your display adapt
er, and for shadowing video ROM and
the ROM BIOS.
Following the upper memory area,
the area beyond 1Mb is known as
“extended” memory. This memory
HIGH MEMORY AREA 64K
0K
0000
Fig.1: the memory configuration
in a PC. The first 640Kb is called
“conventional” memory, while the
area from 640Kb to 1024Kb (1Mb) is
the “upper memory area”. The area
beyond 1Mb is known as “extended”
memory.
requires the use of an extended
memory manager such as HIMEM.
SYS and this device driver is typically loaded as the first line in your
CONFIG.SYS file.
Finally, the first 64Kb of extended memory is known as the “high
September 1995 57
drivers and programs.
On the other hand, if you run a
DOS-based program that does require
expanded memory, you will have to
replace the NOEMS switch with the
RAM switch instead. This will allow
EMM386.EXE to simulate expanded
memory so that the program will run.
For example, the command:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE 512 RAM
By typing mem /c/p at the DOS prompt, you can see which programs are loaded
into conventional memory and which are loaded into upper memory. It will also
tell you how much free conventional memory you have and whether or not MSDOS is resident in the high memory area.
memory area” (HMA). Usually, MSDOS is set to run in the HMA, to free
up conventional memory for use by
other programs.
To see how your computer currently
organises memory, exit Windows and
type mem /c/p at the DOS prompt. This
will show you which programs are
loaded into conventional memory and
which are loaded into upper memory.
It does this by displaying a detailed
listing of the load order and size of
these programs – see Fig.2.
It will also tell you how much free
memory you have, the largest executable program size and whether or
not MS-DOS is resident in the high
memory area.
What MemMaker does
Because the hardware expansion
cards do not use up the entire upper
memory area, it contains free areas of
space and these are known as “upper
memory blocks” (UMBs). When you
run MemMaker, it modifies your AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files
so that some TSRs and device drivers
are loaded into these UMBs instead of
into conventional memory.
As a result, conventional memory
is freed and this can make a big difference to the way your programs run.
58 Silicon Chip
If you’ve already run MemMaker and
subsequently installed additional software, it can also help to avoid memory
management conflicts be reallocating
space in the upper memory blocks.
By the way, in order to load programs into the upper memory blocks,
you must use an expanded memory
manager such as EMM386.EXE. Depending on the entry in your CONFIG.
SYS file, this device driver can also
use extended memory to simulate expanded memory for those DOS-based
programs that require it.
Typically, the first three lines of
CONFIG.SYS will look like this:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS
DOS=HIGH,UMB
Note that it is necessary to load
HIMEM.SYS before EMM386.EXE to
gain access to the upper memory
blocks. The NOEMS switch ensures
that EMM386.EXE behaves as an upper
memory manager only and prevents
it from allocating extended memory
(EMS) for use as expanded memory
(XMS). Use this switch if your programs do not require expanded memory, as this frees an additional 64Kb
of upper memory for running device
will allocate 512Kb of your computer’s
extended memory for use as expanded
memory. Note that you should only
allocate as much expanded memory
as the program requires and this will
usually be specified in the installation
manual.
If the command line that loads
EMM386.EXE is missing, it can easily
be added by editing the CONFIG.SYS
file in an ASCII text editor. Alternatively, the MemMaker program will
automatically install and configure
EMM386.EXE for you.
Start-up disc
Before running MemMaker, it’s
vital that you create a start-up disc in
case anything goes wrong. To do this,
install an unformatted floppy disc in
drive A and type: FORMAT A:/S. This
done, copy your AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS files (and preferably your
SYSTEM.INI file in the Windows directory) to the floppy disc.
That way, if anything goes wrong,
you can boot from the start up disc
and simply copy the original files
over the top of the modified files on
the hard disc.
It’s also a good idea to disable any
commands in your AUTOEXEC.BAT
and CONFIG.SYS files that start unnecessary device drivers and utility
programs. This will help to free up
conven
tional memory by ensuring
that such programs do not compete for
space in upper memory. For example,
if you only use a mouse when running
Windows, then you can disable any
mouse device drivers such as MOUSE.
COM.
To disable a command, simply
open the file in an ASCII text editor
(eg, DOS Edit or Notepad) and insert
a REM statement at the beginning of
the command line, eg:
REM DEVICE =C:\DOS\MOUSE.
This done, save the file and then
reboot the computer. By disabling the
command in this manner, rather than
deleting the line, you can easily restore
it later on if required.
Running MemMaker
MemMaker is supplied with MSDOS 6.0 and above and is straightforward to run – just quit all programs, go
to the command prompt (ie, C:>) and
type Memmaker. All you have to do
then is follow the on-screen prompts
or the step-by-step procedure set out
in the manual.
Unless you are an experienced
user, it’s best to choose Express Setup
(as opposed to Custom Setup) when
running MemMaker for the first time.
You should also initially answer “No”
to the prompt that asks you whether
you use any programs that require
expanded memory, unless you are sure
that the reverse is true.
If you choose No and subsequently
find that some programs no longer
run or display error messages (eg,
“Expanded Memory Unavailable”),
then its simply a matter of running
MemMaker again and answering “Yes”
to the same question.
After you have finished running
MemMaker, take a look at your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files.
In CONFIG.SYS, you will see that
MemMaker has changed certain “device” commands to “devicehigh” and
added switches to those “devicehigh”
commands. Similarly, in AUTOEXEC.
BAT, you will find that MemMaker has
added “lh” (loadhigh) to the beginning
certain commands.
These “devicehigh” and “lh”
commands ensure that the corre
sponding device drivers and TSRs are
loaded into the upper memory area.
Note, however, that HIMEM.SYS and
EMM386.EXE cannot be loaded high.
Now for the acid test – to find out
AUTOEXEC.BAT
Before MemMaker
<at>ECHO OFF
VERIFY OFF
PATH C:\DOS;C:\WINDOWS;C:\ALDUS;C:\PM5;C:\UTIL;
C:\DESKSCAN;C:\TSCSI;
SET TEMP=C:\TEMP
SET DIRCMD=/P/O
PROMPT $P$G
C:\DOS\MOUSE
C:\DOS\MSCDEX.EXE /D:PANASON /L:R
C:\DOS\DOSKEY
VER
WIN
After MemMaker
<at>ECHO OFF
VERIFY OFF
PATH C:\DOS;C:\WINDOWS;C:\ALDUS;C:\PM5;C:\UTIL;
C:\DESKSCAN;C:\TSCSI;
SET TEMP=C:\TEMP
SET DIRCMD=/P/O
PROMPT $P$G
LH /L:3,56928 C:\DOS\MOUSE
LH /L:3,27984 C:\DOS\MSCDEX.EXE /D:PANASON /L:R
LH /L:2,6400 C:\DOS\DOSKEY
VER
WIN
Fig.3 (above): a typical AUTOEXEC.BAT file before and
after running MemMaker. MemMaker has added “LH”
commands to the start of several lines, to ensure that
these TSRs are loaded into the upper memory blocks.
Fig.4 (right): devices are loaded into the upper memory
blocks using the DEVICEHIGH command. Note, however,
that HIMEM.SYS and EMM386.EXE cannot be loaded
high.
what effect MemMaker has had on
your system, go to the command
prompt and again type mem /c/p. You
should see that many (if not all) of
the available device drivers and TSRs
are now loaded into upper memory
instead of conventional memory. In
addition, you should have a corre
sponding increase in conventional
memory.
Fig.3 shows a typical AUTOEXEC.
BAT file before and after running
MemMaker, while Fig.4 shows typical
before and after CONFIG.SYS files.
If you encounter problems after
running MemMaker, you can easily
undo the changes that have been
made. To do this, you simply go to the
command prompt (ie, C:\>) and type:
Memmaker /undo. By then following
the on-screen prompts, the program
will restore the original AUTOEXEC.
BAT, CONFIG.SYS and SYSTEM.INI
files, using backups that it made during
CONFIG.SYS
Before MemMaker
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS X=C800-CBFF
BUFFERS=30,0
FILES=60
DOS=HIGH,UMB
LASTDRIVE=Z
FCBS=4,0
DEVICE=C:\TSCSI\MA348.SYS
DEVICE=C:\TSCSI\TSCSI.SYS
DEVICE=C:\CDMKE.SYS /D:PANASON
DEVICE=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE
DEVICE=C:\DESKSCAN\SJII.SYS
BREAK=ON
COUNTRY=61,,C:\DOS\COUNTRY.SYS
SHELL=C:\DOS\COMMAND.COM C:\DOS\ /E:1024 /p
STACKS=9,256
After MemMaker
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS X=C800-CBFF
BUFFERS=30,0
FILES=60
DOS=HIGH,UMB
LASTDRIVE=Z
FCBS=4,0
DEVICEHIGH /L:2,9568 =C:\TSCSI\MA348.SYS
DEVICEHIGH /L:2,15488 =C:\TSCSI\TSCSI.SYS
DEVICEHIGH /L:2,13472 =C:\CDMKE.SYS /D:PANASON
DEVICEHIGH /L:2,12048 =C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE
DEVICEHIGH /L:1,7040 =C:\DESKSCAN\SJII.SYS
BREAK=ON
COUNTRY=61,,C:\DOS\COUNTRY.SYS
SHELL=C:\DOS\COMMAND.COM C:\DOS\ /E:1024 /p
STACKS=9,256
September 1995 59
Fig.6: this detailed
map shows the
upper memory area
from A000-FFFF.
The gray areas are
treated as ROM and
are reserved for the
video card (C000C7FF) and the ROM
BIOS (F000-FFFF).
The areas marked
with “U” indicated
used UMBs, while
“F” indicates free
UMBs.
the optimisation process.
Alternatively, if you suspect that the
problem might be caused by one or
more commands in AUTOEXEC.BAT
or CONFIG.SYS, you can bypas some
or all of the commands in these files
(MS-DOS 6.0 and above).
To bypass all the commands in
these two files, press the F5 key when
you see the text “Starting MS-DOS . .
.” while the computer is booting up.
Alternatively, to bypass individual
commands, press the F8 key instead
and follow the on-screen prompts to
carry out or bypass each command
in turn.
The Memmaker.sts file
That’s not necessarily the end of the
memory optimisation process. Often,
you can free up even more memory by
changing the order of the command
lines in your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files.
The reason for this is that as each
driver is loaded in turn into the upper
memory area, it uses the largest free
remaining UMB. This means that if
the smaller drivers are loaded first,
the remaining UMBs might not be able
to accommodate some of the larger
drivers.
In this case, these remaining large
device drivers will be loaded into
60 Silicon Chip
conventional memory rather than
upper memory, despite the presence
of “devicehigh” or “lh” commands.
The trick is to reorganise your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files
so that the largest device drivers are
loaded first. That way, it will be easier
to fit the remaining drivers into the
smaller UMBs that are left over.
How do you know the sizes of your
device drivers? Well, when you run
MemMaker for the first time, it logs
this information in a file called MEMMAKER.STS (in the C:\DOS directory).
Open this file in an ASCII text editor (or
better still print it out) and make a note
of the MaxSize line for each command
in the [SizeData] section – see Fig.5.
It’s now simply a matter of editing
the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT
files so that those command lines with
larger MaxFile values are positioned
Command=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE
Line=11
FinalSize=864
MaxSize=12048
FinalUpperSizes=0
MaxUpperSizes=0
ProgramType=DEVICE
Fig.5: a typical section from a
MEMMAKER.STS file. The MaxSize value is the one to note.
above those with smaller MaxFile values (make sure that HIMEM.SYS and
EMM386.EXE are before any of these,
however). Save each file in turn, then
reboot your computer to check that
the system starts properly and that
there are no error messages during
start-up. If all is well, run MemMaker
again to optimise the system for the
revised CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.
BAT files.
By now typing mem /c/p at the command prompt again, you can quickly
check how much more conventional
memory has been freed.
Note, however, that the above
procedure is not always hassle free.
Sometimes, for example, it is necessary to load the drivers for a particular device in a set order (where
more than one driver is involved). If
the order is incorrect, you will get an
error message during boot-up, often
to the effect that a particular driver is
missing. In that case, it’s usually just
a matter of moving the command line
for the “missing” driver ahead of its
companion driver.
Fig.4 shows an example of this. If
you look at this file, you will see that
the line
DEVICEHIGH /L:2,9568 =C:\TSCSI\MA348.SYS
precedes the line
DEVICEHIGH /L:2,15488 =C:\TSCSI\TSCSI.SYS
even though the second line has the
largest MaxSize value. That’s because
it’s necessary to load MA348.SYS
before TSCSI.SYS for this particular
device (an external cartridge drive).
Fine tuning
Now take a look at the detailed
memory map of Fig.6. One important
thing to realise here is that not all
addresses in the upper memory area
are available for loading device drivers
and TSRs. For example, the area from
A000-C800 is reserved as ROM for
video card addresses, while the area
from F000-FFFF is reserved for shadowing the ROM BIOS. Similarly, the
area from E000-EFFF is also normally
a reserved area.
What this means is that these ranges
are out of bounds for use as UMBs unless you specifically instruct EMM386.
EXE to include certain areas within
them (ie, EMM386.EXE does not map
over unused ROM). This is done using
the I= switch.
For example, if your computer has a
VGA or EGA monitor, you can generally include the range of address from
B000-B7FF and from E000-EFFF. In
this case, the EMM386 entry in your
CONFIG.SYS file would look something like this:
Exploring the Memory with MSD
1. To see how
memory is allocated in your machine, go to the
DOS prompt and
type MSD. The
screen shown at
left will appear.
Click on Memory.
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE I=E000-EFFF
I=B000-B7FF NOEMS
If you subsequently find that your
monitor doesn’t respond correctly or
your computer hangs when you start
Windows, delete the I=B000-B7FF
entry. If you still have problems, delete
the I=E000-EFFF statement
On the other hand, it is also often
necessary to specifically exclude certain address ranges to prevent memory
conflicts with hardware cards. If this is
not done, a device driver can be loaded
into the address normally occupied
by the hardware card and this will
prevent the card from being found.
For example, let’s say that you have
a hardware card (eg, a scanner card)
at address C800. In this case, you
might want to exclude the range from
C800-CBFF and this is done using the
X= switch, ie:
2. The resulting
screen shows
free (F) and
used (U) UMBs,
plus areas
which are reserved as ROM.
Click the down
arrow to see
the area below
C000.
3. Clicking
“Utilities” and
then “Memory
Block Display”
brings up this
screen. You can
now examine the
memory allocated
to each driver by
clicking on it
(in this case,
SMARTDRV.EXE).
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE I=E000-EFFF
I=B000-B7FF NOEMS X=C800-CBFF
Note that MemMaker will normally
automatically exclude the address
ranges occupied by hardware cards
the first time you run it. If you subsequently install another hardware card
and you strike problems, try changing the address setting on the card.
Alternatively, you can work through
the section entitled “You Installed A
Hardware Device And Your Computer
Stopped Working” in chapter 8 of the
MS-DOS 6 manual.
By the way, it’s also a good idea to
edit the Emmexclude= entry in SYSTEM.INI, to prevent Windows from
accessing this address range when
running in Enhanced mode – ie, add
the line Emmexclude=C800-CBFF to
the [386Enh] section of SYSTEM.INI.
In addition, some video cards use
additional memory in the region
from C400-C700. Although Windows
automatically detects most of these
cards and avoids this area, there are
cases where you have to specifically
exclude it using the Emmexclude
entry. For example, to avoid the area
from C400-C7FF (to prevent conflict
with a video card) and from C800-CBFF to prevent conflict with another
hardware card, the line would read:
Emmexclude=C400-CBFF.
If you are still having trouble running Windows in enhanced mode (eg
if the system frequently crashes), try
starting Windows using the “/d:x”
switch – ie, type win /d:x at the
command prompt. This will prevent
Windows from accessing any of the
upper memory area and is equivalent
to adding Emmexclude=A000-EFFF
to SYSTEM.INI.
If this solves the problem it means
that there is a conflict with some hardware card that Windows is unable to
detect. To solve this problem, you need
to identify which hardware card is
causing the problem and then exclude
its address with Emmexclude. To find
out the address, check the address
switches on the card or use the Micro
soft Diagnostics program MSD.EXE .
Try to limit the excluded the range
to the specific card. If Windows is
unable to find enough free UMBs for
what are called “translation buffers”
when it loads, it uses conventional
memory instead. As a result, there
will be less memory available to run
non-Windows applications.
Finally, if it’s all too hard, consider
upgrading to Windows 95. With this
system, the old DOS/Windows combination is gone and you don’t have
to worry about tweaking AUTOEXEC.
BAT, CONFIG.SYS and SYSTEM.INI
files. Is your computer up to Windows
95? Here we go again!
SC
September 1995 61
Further Notes On The
Train Detector
For Model Railways
As soon as the June 1995 issue appeared on the
streets, we received very favourable feedback to
the Train Detector circuit. But as often happens,
one reader wanted to use it in a way we had not
envisaged. In this short article, we feature his
problem and describe how to solve it.
By LEO SIMPSON
The reader’s problem is as follows
and sets out an application where the
block switching covered in the June
1995 article is not required. This application envisages the Train Detector
being used in a one-off situation.
Reader’s letter
I am keen to build the Train Detector
featured in the June 1995 issue and
wish to use it with the Sound & Lights
for Level Crossings, as featured in the
April 1994 issue. My problem is that
I don’t want to use the block switching system you describe for the Train
Detector. I just want to use it to detect
the train moving into the section which
has the level crossing.
I also don’t want to run wires all
the way back to my train controller
Fig.1: this diagram
shows how to connect
the Train Detector board
to the Train Controller
without using block
switching. Note that the
current for the isolated
track section must flow
through the two large
detector diodes.
ISOLATED
RAIL
COMMON
RAIL
RAIL 2
TRACK 1
+/-
TRAIN
CONTROLLER
TRACK 2
0V
AC SIGNAL
RAIL 1
+12V
0V
-12V
OUTPUT
GND
62 Silicon Chip
(Infrared Remote Control, April & May
1992) because I have a large layout
and I want to minimise the amount
of extra wiring required. Therefore,
instead of wiring back to the controller
I just want to wire the Track Detector
directly off the track where the level
crossing is going to be. Now, if that
doesn’t sound too confusing, how do
I go about it? Finally, can I use the
same power supply to run the Sound &
Lights circuit as for the Train Detector?
(K. A., Mona Vale, NSW).
How it’s done
It’s amazing, isn’t it? No matter
how much thought we put into the
presentation of these projects, someone always writes in to ask how to do
something else that we hadn’t thought
of doing. As it happens, this proposal
does not present any real problems.
First, you do need a section of the
track to be isolated from the rest of the
layout. One rail can be common to the
rest of the layout and one section of
rail must be isolated, as shown in the
diagram of Fig.1. This shows one side
of the controller wired to the common
rail (rail 1) while the other side of the
train controller goes to the 0V terminal
on the Train Detector PC board. The
rail 1 connection also connects to the
track 1 terminal on the PC board (labelled “+/-” on the copper side of the
board). The isolated rail (rail 2) goes to
the track 2 terminal on the PC board,
adjacent to the 0V terminal.
Fig.1 shows how the train controller
is connected to the isolated section of
track but the reader wants to wire the
Train Detector directly to the track,
without wiring back to the controller.
OK, Fig.2 shows how to do it. This
shows a track with an isolated section.
As before, the common rail is rail 1
while the isolated rail is rail 2. The
corresponding rail connections to the
COMMON
RAIL
SATELLITE
SUPPLIES
RAIL 1
TRACK 1
+/-
AC SIGNAL
RAIL 2
Aussat systems
from under $850
ISOLATED
RAIL
SATELLITE RECEIVERS FROM .$280
+12V
TRACK 2
0V
-12V
0V
OUTPUT
GND
LNB’s Ku FROM ..............................$229
LNB’s C FROM .................................$330
FEEDHORNS Ku BAND FROM ......$45
FEEDHORNS C.BAND FROM .........$95
DISHES 60m to 3.7m FROM ...........$130
Fig.2: this diagram shows how the Train Detector can be wired to an isolated
section of track without the need for any connections to the Train Controller
itself. Note that, as before, the current for the isolated track section must flow
through the two detector diodes.
Train Detector are the same as in Fig.1.
Note that the DC and AC connections
from the power supply to the Train
Detector must still be as shown in
Fig.3 on page 29 of the June 1995 issue.
One small point to note with this
proposal is that the voltage applied
from the train controller to the isolated
track section will be lower by 0.6V
than the voltage supplied to the rest
of the track.
This is a consequence of the voltage drop across the current detector
diodes, D1 & D2. This will lead to a
small drop in speed as the loco enters
the isolated track section and a slight
pick-up in speed as the loco leaves
the section but this is unlikely to lead
to problems and may actually give an
increase in realism.
As far as the idea of using the
Train Detector power supply for the
Sound & Lights circuit is concerned,
remember that the Train Detector has
+12V, 0V & -12V supply lines while
the Sound & Lights circuit needs only
+12V and 0V lines. In that case, all
you need do is to connect the +12V
and 0V lines from the Train Detector
power supply to the Sound & Lights
board. The output line from the Train
Connector goes to the input of the
Sound & Lights board.
There is no need to connect the
GND terminal on the Train Detector
to the GND terminal on the Sound &
Lights board since the circuit will be
completed via the 0V connections.
Do not make any connection from the
-12V line to the Sound & Lights board.
Especially For Model
Railway Enthusiasts
This book has 14 model railway projects for you
to build, including pulse power throttle controllers,
a level crossing detector with matching lights
& sound effects, & diesel sound & steam
sound simulators. If you are a model railway
enthusiast, then this collection of projects from
Silicon Chip is a must.
Price: $7.95 (plus $3 p&p). Order by phoning (02) 9979 5644 & quoting your
credit card number; or fax the details to (02) 9979 6503; or send a cheque,
money order or credit card details to PO Box 139, Collaroy, NSW 2097.
LOTS OF OTHER ITEMS
FROM COAXIAL CABLE,
DECODERS, ANGLE
METERS, IN-LINE COAX
AMPS, PAY-TV DECODER
FOR JAPANESE, NTSC TO
PAL TRANSCODERS, E-PAL
DECODERS, PLUS MANY
MORE
For a free catalogue, fill in & mail
or fax this coupon.
✍
Please send me a free catalog
on your satellite systems.
Name:____________________________
Street:____________________________
Suburb:_________________________
P/code________Phone_____________
L&M Satellite Supplies
33-35 Wickham Rd, Moorabin 3189
Ph (03) 9553 1763; Fax (03) 9532 2957
September 1995 63
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.altronics.com.au
64 Silicon Chip
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.altronics.com.au
September 1995 65
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.altronics.com.au
66 Silicon Chip
ORDER FORM
BACK ISSUES
MONTH
YEAR
MONTH
YEAR
PR ICE EACH (includes p&p)
Australi a $A7.00; NZ $A8.00 (airmail ); Elsewhere $A10
(airmail ). Buy 10 or more and get a 10% discount.
Note: Nov 87-Aug 88; Oct 88-Mar 89; June 89; Aug 89;
Dec 89; May 90; Aug 91; Feb 92; July 92; Sept 92; NovDec 92; & March 98 are sol d out. All other issues are
currently i n stock.
TOTAL
$A
B INDERS
Pl ease send me _______ SILICON CHIP bi nder(s) at
$A12.95 + $5.00 p&p each (Australi a only). N ot avail abl e
elsewhere. Buy five and get them postage free.
$A
SUBSCRIPTIONS
❏ New subscription – month to start___________________________
❏ Renewal – Sub. No._______________ ❏ Gift subscription ☞
RATES (please tick one)
Australia
Australia with binder(s)*
NZ & PNG (airmail)
Overseas surface mail
2 years (24 issues) 1 year (12 issues)
❏ $A90
❏ $A49
❏ $A114
❏ $A61
❏ $A135
❏ $A72
❏ $A135
❏ $A72
❏ $A240
Overseas airmail
❏ $A120
*1 binder with 1-year subscription; 2 binders with 2-year subscription
GIFT SUBSCRIPTION DETAILS
Month to start__________________
Message_____________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
Gift for:
Name_________________________
(PLEASE PRINT)
YOUR DETAILS
Your Name_________________________________________________
(PLEASE PRINT)
Address___________________________________________________
Address______________________
_____________________________
State__________Postcode_______
______________________________________Postcode___________
Daytime Phone No.____________________Total Price $A __________
❏ Cheque/Money Order
❏ Bankcard ❏ Visa Card ❏ Master Card
9am-5pm Mon-Fri.
Please have your credit card
details ready
______________________________
Card expiry date________/________
Card No.
Phone (02) 9979 5644
Signature
OR
Fax (02) 9979 6503
Fax the coupon with your
credit card details
24 hours 7 days a week
Mail coupon to:
OR
Reply Paid 25
Silicon Chip Publications
PO Box 139, Collaroy 2097
No postage stamp required in Australia
September 1995 67
Build a Jacob’s Ladder
display & amaze
your friends
Ever since scientific showmen like Tesla
and Edison were able to generate really high
voltages, the Jacob’s Ladder display has been
creating awe amongst laymen. In this article,
we show how you can build your own Jacob’s
Ladder using a low cost circuit.
By LEO SIMPSON & JOHN CLARKE
Virtually any high voltage power
supply which generates more than
about 10kV (DC or AC) can be used
to provide a Jacob’s Ladder display.
The display consists of two vertical
wires close spaced at the bottom and
splayed apart to increase the gap as
the spark rises.
It is the paradoxical nature of the
ladder discharge which intrigues
most people. Who would believe
that the spark would want to become
longer and travel upward, seeming-
ly defying gravity? And surely the
spark would take the shortest path
rather than extend itself as it travels
upward.
In reality, the spark discharge is taking the easiest route from one electrode
to the other. Initially, the discharge
does take the shortest path which is
at the bottom of the wires. But the
Jacob’s Ladder display works because
the continuous spark discharge gets
hot and heats up the air around it.
This heated ionised air rises, carrying
Fig.1: the circuit uses 555 timer IC1 to pulse transistors Q1 & Q2
on and off. Q2 in turn drives a standard automotive ignition coil
and this delivers high voltage pulses to the ladder.
JACOB'S
LADDER
L1
IGNITION
COIL
F1
10A
12V
the discharge with it until the gap is
too wide to maintain the spark. The
discharge then starts at the bottom
again and works its way back up and
the cycle continues.
Why is it called a Jacob’s Ladder?
We don’t know who first came up
with the name but it is an allusion to
the Bible story of Jacob: “He dreamed
that he saw a ladder standing on the
earth, with its top reaching into heaven; a stairway for the angels of God
to go up and come down” (Genesis,
XXVIII;12).
The high voltage supply is easy –either of the plasma bottle displays from
the August or November 1988 issues
of SILICON CHIP will do the trick but
there is a better approach – adapt the
low cost Electric Fence Controller
from the July 1995 issue of SILICON
CHIP. A kit for this design is available
from Dick Smith Electronics and from
Jaycar Electronics and only requires a
few simple modifications.
D1
1N4004
10
470
16VW
ZD4
16V
1W
1k
7
12k
4
IC1
555
6
2
B
E
C
E
B
C
8
Q1
BC327 E
3 2.2k B
Q2
MJ10012
100
C
C 5W
B
5
1
0.1
0.33
VIEWED FROM BELOW
JACOB'S LADDER EHT DRIVER
68 Silicon Chip
E
ZD1
75V
5W
ZD2
75V
5W
ZD3
75V
5W
HT
GND
PARTS LIST
1 PC board, code 11306951,
171 x 79mm
1 12V ignition coil (see text)
3 280 x 5mm cable ties
5 PC stakes
2 3AG PC mount fuse clips
1 10A 3AG fuse
2 5mm ID crimp eyelet terminals
1 TO-3 transistor insulating cap
2 3mm screws, nuts and star
washers
1 red battery clip
1 black battery clip
1 ignition coil EHT connector
1 2-way terminal block
1 2m length of twin red/black
automotive wire
1 60mm length of red heavy duty
hook-up wire
1 60mm length of blue heavy
duty hook-up wire
1 370mm length of 1.5mm
copper wire
1 40mm length of 0.8mm tinned
copper wire
Semiconductors
1 555 timer (IC1)
1 BC327 PNP transistor (Q1)
1 MJ10012 500V NPN
Darlington (Q2)
1 1N4004 1A diode (D1)
3 75V 5W zener diodes (ZD1ZD3)
1 16V 1W zener diode (ZD4)
Capacitors
1 470µF 16VW PC electrolytic
1 0.33µF MKT polyester
1 0.1µF MKT polyester
This photo is really a composite of two separate photographs which were
combined using a computer. It shows how the spark climbs the ladder formed
by the two vertical wires attached to the ignition coil. Note that the multiple
discharge paths shown here are a result of the ¼-second exposure time used
when taking the photo. In practice, fewer sparks are visible at any one time.
Actually, using the Electric Fence
Controller to generate the spark discharge provides a big advantage in that
the resulting Jacob’s Ladder is much
more spectacular.
Instead of having just one spark
discharge which climbs up the wires,
our version produces about 130 sparks
second, so you have a whole series of
sparks which appear to be climbing
up the wires, as shown in the accompanying photo.
The result is noisy and smelly, and
all those sparks look quite nasty and
dangerous – as indeed they are.
How it works
The Jacob’s Ladder is based on an
automotive ignition coil. These can be
purchased new from automotive retail
ers but will be cheaper if purchased
secondhand from motor wreckers.
Select one which requires a ballast
resistor.
The circuit comprises a 555 timer
IC, two transistors, the ignition coil
Resistors (0.25W 1%)
1 12kΩ
1 100Ω 5W
1 2.2kΩ
1 10Ω
1 1kΩ
and several resistors, capacitors and
diodes – see Fig.1. The revised circuit
pulls a lot more current than the Electric Fence Controller and generates
lots of fat, juicy sparks instead of the
deliberately restricted high voltage
transients of the original circuit.
IC1 is a 555 timer used to produce
the short pulses. Note that we used
a standard 555 timer here since it is
more rugged than the CMOS (7555)
version and less likely to be damaged
by any high voltage transients which
September 1995 69
The ignition coil is secured to the PC board using plastic cable ties, while a
plastic cap is fitted to Darlington transistor Q2 to prevent unexpected shocks
during testing. Note that you don’t have to buy a new coil – a secondhand coil
obtained from a wrecker’s yard will do the job quite nicely.
may be present on the PC board.
IC1 is connected to oscillate at about
133Hz, as determined by the 0.33µF
capacitor at pin 6 and the associated
12kΩ and 1kΩ resistors. The two resistors set the duty cycle of the pulse
train delivered by pin 3 at essentially
14:13; ie, close to a square wave.
When pin 3 is high, transistor Q1
is held off and no base current flows
in Q2. When pin 3 goes low, Q1 is
switched on due to the base current
flow through the 2.2kΩ resistor and
Q1 switches on Q2 via its 100Ω base
resistor. The coil now begins to charge
via fuse F1. The instant pin 3 goes high
again, Q2 switches off and the coil
develops a high voltage and generates
a spark across the gap.
Q2 is an MJ10012 Darlington power
transistor, specifically designed as
a coil driver in automotive ignition
systems. It has a 500V collector-emitter rating so it can withstand the high
voltages developed across the coil’s
primary winding.
Depending on the spark gap, the
coil’s peak primary voltage will only be
about 200V or so, but if the gap is very
large or the coil is operated without
any EHT output lead, the secondary
voltage can be excessive and there can
be a flashover inside the coil. Not only
can this damage the coil but it can also
produce a very high primary voltage
points. This done, solder in all the
low profile components such as the
IC, diodes and resistors. Table 1 lists
the resistor colour codes but it is also
a good idea to check the resistor values using a digital multimeter before
soldering them in position.
Now solder in the capacitors, taking
care to ensure that the 470µF electrolytic is oriented as shown. Take care
to ensure that the semiconductors
are correctly oriented as well. In par
ticular, note that D1 (1N4004) faces
in the opposite direction to the three
zener diodes (ZD1-ZD3). Note that ZD4
is mounted under the PC board across
the 470µF capacitor. Pin 1 of the IC is
adjacent to a notch in one end of the
plastic body.
Transistor Q1 should be pushed
down onto the board as far as it will
easily go before soldering its leads.
Q2 is secured directly to the board
(ie, no insulating washer) using 3mm
machine screws and nuts.
As well as securing Q2 in place,
these mounting screws and nuts also
connect Q2’s collector (ie, the case)
to a track on the PC board. To ensure
reliable connections, use star washers
under the screw heads and solder the
nuts to their surrounding copper pads.
This done, fit an insulating cap to Q2
– this will prevent any nasty shocks
during the testing procedure.
The 100Ω 5W wirewound resistor
is mounted about 6mm above the
PC board, to avoid any possibility of
charring – it does get hot.
which may damage Q2.
Accordingly, three 75V 5W zener
diodes, ZD1 to ZD3, are connected in
series across Q2 to limit the primary
voltage developed by the coil to about
225V, well within the transistor’s rating of 500V.
Power supply
Power for IC1 is provided by the battery via fuse F1, the 10Ω resistor and
diode D1. A 470µF capacitor filters the
supply to provide reliable triggering
for the timer. Transient protection is
provided with ZD4, a 16V zener diode.
A 0.1µF capacitor at pin 5 filters the
trigger point voltage to ensure that the
timer does not false trigger.
Diode D1 offers reverse polarity protection for IC1, while the fuse protects
the battery from supplying excessive
current should a fault occur.
Construction
The circuit is constructed on a PC
board coded 11306951 and measuring
171 x 79mm. This board, together
with the ignition coil mounted on it,
fits neatly inside a 230mm length of
90mm plastic stormwater pipe (available from plumbing supply outlets).
Fig.2 shows the assembly details for
the PC board.
Begin the assembly by installing
PC stakes at the five external wiring
TABLE 1: RESISTOR COLOUR CODES
❏
No.
Value
4-Band Code (1%)
5-Band Code (1%)
❏
1
12kΩ
brown red orange brown
brown red black red brown
❏
1
2.2kΩ
red red red brown
red red black brown brown
❏
1
1kΩ
brown black red brown
brown black black brown brown
❏
1
10Ω
brown black black brown
brown black black gold brown
70 Silicon Chip
▲
JACOB'S
LADDER
Fig.2 (left): install the parts on the PC board as shown in this
wiring diagram, making sure that all polarised parts are correctly
oriented. The EHT connection to the coil is made using a brass
EHT ignition coil connector.
Warning!
TERMINAL
BLOCK
This Jacob’s Ladder display uses very high
voltage which can give a nasty shock. Do not
put your fingers near the display or coil while
ever the power is applied.
Fig.3 (below): check your PC board for defects by
comparing it against this full-size etching pattern
before installing any of the parts.
CABLE TIE
IGNITION
COIL
CABLE TIE
CABLE TIE
10
100
5W
Q1
IC1
555
F1
D1
1k
12k
12V
BATTERY
POSITIVE
Q2
2.2k
0.1
1
0.33
ZD1-ZD3
470uF
ZD4
12V
BATTERY
NEGATIVE
September 1995 71
The fuse clips can now be installed.
Note that these each have a little lug at
one end to retain the fuse after it has
been installed. These lugs must go to
the outside ends, otherwise you will
not be able to fit the fuse.
The ignition coil is secured to the
PC board using three cable ties (see
photo), after which the leads can be
run to its primary terminals. These
leads should be terminated using
5mm eyelet connectors to allow for
easy connection to the coil. Don’t
just crimp the connectors to these
leads – solder them as well to ensure
long-term reliability.
Finally, complete the construction
by fitting the twinlead battery cable
(red to positive, black to negative). The
free ends of this cable are fitted with
large (30A) battery clips
the battery leads and carefully slide
the assembly into its 90mm tubular
plastic housing. This done, feed the
battery cable through the hole in its
end cap, secure it using a cordgrip
grommet and reconnect the leads to
the PC board.
The board assembly will be held
in position when the end caps are
fitted and, generally, this should be
sufficient. However, if you wish the
board to be held even more securely,
wrap a small amount of foam rubber
around the top of the coil so that the
assembly is a tight fit within the tube.
We made our Jacob’s Ladder spark
gap with a 220mm length and a 150mm
length of 1.5mm copper wire. The
shorter length was soldered to an
ignition connector which plugs into
the coil EHT, while the longer wire
was soldered to the GND terminal.
We used a 2-way terminal block to
separate the wires at the base of the
ladder. If enamelled copper wire is
used, scrape the insulation away along
the inside edges to allow the spark to
travel freely.
Testing
Before you apply power, you must
provide a temporary spark gap for
the ignition coil, otherwise it could
be damaged, as noted above. The gap
can be made quite simply with a paper
clip. Extend the paper clip so that you
have a hooked section at each end.
Fit one hook into the EHT socket on
the coil and make sure that it cannot
fall out easily. This done, bend the
other end of the clip so that it is close
to (less than 5mm) but not touching
the negative primary connection of
the coil.
Now for the smoke test. Immediately, there should be a continuous spark
across the temporary spark gap. Do not
attempt to touch any part of the coil
while power is applied because it can
give you a very nasty shock!
If everything works OK, disconnect
M
FRO
NEW N CHIP
O
SILIC
No kinks
A large coffee jar placed over the
ladder will prevent high-voltage
shocks, although it does tend to
diminish the spectacle of the display.
Note that the two wires should be as
straight as possible without any kinks.
Any slight kinks will mean that the
sparks will not progress smoothly up
the ladder but will tend to “stick” at
the kinks. So keep the wires as straight
as possible and splay them apart very
slightly so that the gap at the top is no
more than about 20mm.
You can also place a large coffee
jar over the complete assembly for
safety’s sake (see photo) although this
does tend to diminish the spectacle of
SC
the display.
20 Electronic
Projects For Cars
On sale now at selected newsagents
Or order your copy from Silicon Chip. Price: $8.95 (plus $3 for postage).
Order by phoning (02) 979 5644 & quoting your credit card number; or fax the
details to (02) 979 6503; or mail your order with cheque or credit card details
to Silicon Chip Publications, PO Box 139, Collaroy, NSW 2097.
72 Silicon Chip
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.avcomm.com.au
September 1995 73
Design by ROGER KENT*
Audio Lab: a
PC-controlled audio
test instrument; Pt.2
In this second article on Audio Lab, we include
all the circuit and wiring diagrams and give
a rundown on the software. The calibration
procedure includes 10 multi-turn pots and the
software guides you through the full procedure.
In last month’s article, the operation
of Audio Lab and the functions of the
various PC boards were described.
Two more PC boards remain to be
mentioned. The power supply board
is fed by an external AC plugpack
capable of delivering 1A. The 25-pin
74 Silicon Chip
D connector for the serial port is also
mounted on this board, together with
the reset switch which is mounted on
the rear of the case.
There is also an optional board for
fault-finding on the Boot board. This
consists of eight LEDs with limiting
resistors and plugs into port P1 on
the Boot board. How this is used will
be described later in the construction
details but before we move on to that
topic we will discuss some of the
system software.
System software
On power up, machine code software is dumped from the PC to Audio
Lab via the serial port. To show the
code has been successfully loaded,
the LEDs on Audio Lab flash and a
verification message is displayed on
the PC. The opening menu screen
is then accessed and the various
+5V
CONN 5
TO A-D
PCB
D0
8
D1
7
D2
6
D3
5
D4
4
28
20
1
D0
A0
D1
A1
D2
A2
D3
12
14
15
D6
D7
11
11
8
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
D0
C3
0.1
OE 22
A14 27
D1
A13
A13 26
A12 2
D2
D3
9
10
IC6d
D5
D7
14
C6
0.1
8
D6
IC4 D7
20 CE RAM
1 A14
26 A13
2 A12
RD
WR
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
22
27
+5V
CE
20
12
14
C4
0.1
C8
0.1
D5
24 A9
25 A8
A9 24
A8 25
D6
D4
23 A11
21 A10
A11 23
A10 21
D4
A13
+5V
C18
1
D3
4 A6
3 A7
IC3
EPROM
+5V
C1
0.1
D1
D2
6 A4
5 A5
6 A4
5 A5
4 A6
3 A7
D0
8 A2
7 A3
8 A2
7 A3
IC2 A3
D4 74HC573 A4 16
3
17
D5
A5
2
18
D6
A6
1
19
D7
A7
D5
10 A0
9 A1
10 A0
9 A1
13
C17
0.1
1
A15
5
A14
4
14
IC6c
13
7
74HC00
IC6a
11
J4
3 A000
2
1
3
A000
2
IC6b
C000
6
A000
40
C14
10
9
C000
30 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
ALE P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7 P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7
16
P3.6
+5V
IC1
80C31
18
X1
11.059MHz
P3.0 P3.1
10 11
19
P3.6
P3.5
P3.4
P3.4 14
13
P3.3
12
P3.2
P3.7 P3.5
RESET
R1
1k
P3.7
31
20
17
P3.3
P3.2
CONN 3
TO A-D
PCB
15
+5V
C15
33pF
CONN 1
TO PSU
PCB
RST
C16
33pF
C9
10
2
+5V
16
10
RST
OUT
7
IN
8
0V
3
IC7
ADM232
IN 7805 OUT
C7
0.1
GND
C2
1
TANT
5
+5V
C5
1
TANT
C13
1
TANT
AUDIO LAB BOOT PCB
C12
10
6
2
3
C10
10
7
3
C11
10
15
4
1
J1
4
REG3
+DC
1
1
9
16
IC5
74HC257
10
11
5
13
2
14
6
15
8
I G0
Fig.1: The boot board circuit contains the 80C31 microprocessor, the EPROM, RAM and the RS-232 interface chip.
measurement options can be select
ed. The “Lab” screen consists of five
main sections: a scope display which
graphs the selected input, a display
of the Audio Lab front panel which
shows which Range, Mode and Mon-
itor functions have been selected, two
digital readouts showing the output
frequency of the sinewave generator
September 1995 75
+5V
+5V
20
19
R12
10k
VREF
4
D0
D2
INT
16 D2
15 D3
D3
D4
ZD1
CZM242
2.5V
WR
D6
CONN 3
FROM
BOOT
PCB
C11
1
C4
0.1
3
R14
10k
C7
O.1
C6
0.1
C1
0.1
R13
330
D2
1N914
+5V
R10
100k
RD 2
CE
8
1
10
C8
0.1
5
7
12 D6
11 D7
D7
C13
0.1
-5V
C10
33pF
14 D4
13 D5
D5
C12
1
VIN 6
18 D0
17 D1
D1
9
IC7
ADC0804
C9
100pF
R5
1k
R11
10k
Q1
2N3904 C
B
IC3
4093
2
14
1
3
5
IC3b
1
4
E
D1
1N914
3
2
6
7
IC6a
C5
100pF
R5
20k
+5V
16
LIN GAIN R8
VR3 20k 20k
+5V
20
2
19
D0 IC5 DL0
18
3
74HC574
D1
DL1
17
4
D2
DL2
16
5
D3
DL3
15
6
D4
DL4
14
7
D5
DL5
13
8
DL6
D6
9
DL7 12
D7
OE
CK
10 11
1
CONN 2
PSU
PCB
+5V
0V
-5V
P3.5
P3.6
P3.7
A000
7
V IN
+5V
YY
0V
12
C000
5
P3.7
4
11
R2
10k
2
5
C3
220
6
IC1
AD736JN
1
8
IC2a
3 TL072
R3
10k
8
1
4
-5V
C
E
B
VIEWED FROM BELOW
IC6b
C000
+5V
2
C2
10
R6
20k
D-SINE
6
7
3
4
-5V
+5V
R4
20k
VREF
SINE OUT
-5V
IC6c +5V
74HC32
14
P3.6 13
7
R1
10k
R7
10k
RMS
CAL
VR2
20k
+5V
DL7
SINE OUT
7
IC2b
12
1
-5V
DL6
A000
P3.4
DL3
DL5
5
C14
0.1
DL4
P3.3
P3.3
6
8
DL1
6
13
LIN NULL
VR2
20k
R9
3 68k
IC4
4052
4
DL2
P3.4
CONN 4
FROM
BOOT PCB
P3.2
CONN 1
TO FRONT
PCB
DL0
10
9
11
-5V
P3.2
AUDIO LAB A-D CONVERTER
76 Silicon Chip
coloured green toggle between two
options, and items coloured light
blue signify that a selection of values
is available.
For example, on the “Lab” screen
the options on the menu bar are: “—”,
Input, Mike, Sine, Rms, Lin, *FREQ,
*COMP, *SWEEP, Scroll and EXIT.
To select an option, move the mouse
Fig.2 (above): the A-D converter board
is based on an ADC0804 8-bit A-D
converter and also features the AD736
true-RMS converter.
Fig.3 (right): the front panel board
carries all the analog input circui
try and CMOS switches which are
controlled by the 80C31 processor. 12
LEDs are used to indicate the various
measurement modes.
▲
and the input voltage of the selected
input, and finally, the Menu select bar
at the bottom of the screen.
All the screens use the same method
to select the different options. Any
red item on the Menu bar has another
screen or further options available
when that function is selected by
clicking the left mouse button. Items
16
CONN 1
DL0
DL0 10 A
DL1
R19
5.1k
1x 14
DL2
DL3
9
DL1
DL4
B
0x
XX
500
R27
91k
IC3
4052
DL7
7
R28
820k
-5V
SINE IN
C10
0.1
V OUT
+5V
DC
SINE IN
DL6
R43
10k B
IC2a
TL072
1
-5V
RMS
LED7
R42
DL7 10k B
C
Q1
2N3904
E
VOUT
C4
0.1
C1
0.1
R3
COARSE
VR10 20k 680
5
IC2b
C7
1
IC4a
16
11 A 4 IN/OUT
1
DL3
10 B 6 IN/OUT 2
DL4
9 C 5 IN/OUT 5
IC7
4051
15
2 IN/OUT
1 IN/OUT
0 IN/OUT
7
DL0
DL1
8
COMP
LED12
A
RANGE2
LED4
14
13
K
330
RANGE10
LED1
LED5
R45
8.2k
SINE
LED11
MIC
LED8
R37
330
RANGE5
LED2
16
IC6
4052
x10
LED4
15
14
12
2x
1x
0x
IN/OUT
x
A
B OUT/IN
10 9
13 7
R46
8.2k
ELECTRET
+5V
S1
+5V
C2
1
C3
33pF
3
R2
100k
2
K
B
C
E
VIEWED FROM
BELOW
8
IC1a
TL072
5
R8
20k
C6
1
1
MIC
GAIN
VR8 20k
DL0 DL1
A
8
C13
10
MICROPHONE
8
OUT/IN
DL2 11 A
DL3 10 B
DL4 9 C
x1
6 IN/OUT
R18
20k
x0.1
LED6
4 IN/OUT
3
DL4
R36
7 IN/OUT
7
3
-5V
DL3
DL2
1
2
1
4
R40
330
R22
200k
-5V
200k
C8
0.1
4
R5
680
1.5pF
R17
-5V
R24
20k
SINE ADJ
VR1
20k 2
C5
47
C9
DL2
+5V
0 IN/OUT
R11
10k
7
IC1b
R23
20k
7
8
R4
10k
4
R6
8.2k
IN914
LIN
LED10
13
R12
10k
SINE
OUTPUT
6
5
+5V
C12
0.1
0V
C11
0.1
-5V
R15
680
S2b
FINE
VR9 1k
R7
8.2k
R39
330
D1
R14
8.2k
S2a
LOW
R38
330
+5V
14 1 IN/OUT
R34
200k
+5V
COMPONENT
A
B
4
R10
8.2k
Q2
2N3904
R35
100k
VR4
500
6
HIGH
3
C
E
R44
200W LOW
R16
100k
R13
270k
HIGH
2
7
R25
43k
VR3
5k
COMP CAL
VR2 20k
R9
10k
IC4b
TL072
IC5
4051
8
R41
330
FREQ
LED9
6
R33
100k
R26
820k
-5V
4y IN/OUT 1
1y IN/OUT 5
+5V
8
15 2 IN/OUT
4
2
3y IN/OUT
2y IN/OUT
-5V
5
R30
10k
-5V
AC
3
Y OUT/IN
0V
R29
820k
OFFSET
VR7
5k
D2
1N914
16
R32
100k
R31
10k
D3
1N914
R20
680
VR6
R21
12 560
DL5
DL6
+5V
VR5
5k
R1
680
AUDIO LAB FRONT PCB
September 1995 77
mouse clicked then the screen reverts
back to the previous setting. “OPTS”
always has this function from any
screen. Similarly, if “Mike” or “Sine”
is selected then the mike input or
the sine output is monitored and
displayed. “Scroll” is light blue and
toggles between “Plot” and “Scroll”
which are two different modes on the
“Scope” display.
DB25
TO COM 2
CONN 4
TO BOOT
PCB
RESET OUT IN 0V +DC
S1
RESET
2x1N4004
D2
IN
9-10VAC
1A
D1
C1
3300
25VW
REG1
7805
GND
Measuring components
OUT
1
TANT
+5V
0V
F1
1A
7805
7905
-5V
C2
3300
25VW
GND
IN
I GO
GIO
CONN 1
TO A-D
PCB
1
TANT
REG2
7905
OUT
AUDIO LAB POWER SUPPLY
Fig.4: the power supply is fed from a 9V AC plugpack and uses two halfwave
rectifiers together with 3-terminal regulators to produce the ±5V rails.
until the desired selection is highlighted in yellow. Press the left mouse
button and the selection is made. If
“Input” has been selected, then the
first item on the menu bar changes
to “Range” and the monitor input is
switched to the input terminals. The
range is shown on the LEDs and also
on the video screen. If RANGE is now
selected, the menu bar changes to
enable the range of the input voltage
required to be selected; ie, 250mV,
500mV up to 100V.
If “OPTS” is highlighted and the
If “*COMP” is selected, the component measuring facility is loaded. To
use this, the setting of the High/Low
range switch must be entered and if
the switch is changed at any time, the
setting must be re-entered, otherwise
the calculations will be meaningless.
As described in last month’s article,
a two-component potential divider
with one of the components being
accurately known (P/Res) is used to
measure resistance, capacitance and
inductance. The software defaults
to measure resistance with P/Res at
100kΩ and frequency of 1kHz. The
scope screen and Volts display indicate the voltage with respect to zero
(Vx) at the junction of the potential
divider.
If the range switch is in the High
position, then three values of P/Res
are available: 1kΩ, 10kΩ and 100kΩ.
By switching between these values,
resistances from 200Ω to 10MΩ can
be measured and displayed, as well as
impedance. For a pure resistance, the
displayed resistance and impedance
will remain the same irrespective of
the frequency applied to the potential
divider. If the resistor under test is
not “pure”, (most wirewound resis
tors have significant inductance, for
example), then the im
pedance will
vary with frequency.
Low value inductances
The A-D board plugs into the Boot board as shown in this photograph, with the
interconnections made via two 8-way pin connectors (CONN3 and CONN5). The
A-D board is then secured in position using Nylon spacers and machine screws
and nuts.
78 Silicon Chip
Low value inductances can have
significant resistance which causes
misleading results when they are being
measured. If LOW range is selected
when measuring inductance, another option is available on the menu
bar, namely S.res. When selected,
this measures the impedance of low
value inductors at 10Hz. The series
resistance is measured, displayed, and
then can be used when calculating the
inductance.
The X1 and X5 toggles on the menu
bar increase the resolution of the potential divider when measuring high
value impedanc
es with the range
switch set high, or low value impedances with the range switch set low.
1
C3
J1
1
1
IC5
74HC257
IC4
RAM
IC3
EPROM
C15
C4
CONN5
1
J4
IC6
74HC00
CONN4
IC1
80C31
C14
CONN3
IC7
ADM232
C6
C9
C10
C11
C12
RST
C5
REG3
OUT
IN
OV
+DC
1
X1
C16
CONN2
1
2
3
C15
1
C13
1
2
3
1
IC2
74HC573
As the measurements taken by Audio Lab are obtained by an 8-bit analog
to digital conversion, the data has a
maximum reso
lution of 255 steps.
Also, because the equations used to
calculate impedance are non-linear,
the accuracy of the reading is a func
tion of where in the range the measurements are taken.
The “Scale%” display gives an indication of this accuracy. This is not
an absolute indication of the accuracy
of the system but is calculated by
computing the value of the impedance of the device under test at the
next quantised step and displaying it
as a percentage of the actual reading.
This enables a choice to be made as
to which combination of P/Res and
frequency to use to obtain the highest
accuracy.
The last selection on the menu bar
is “*SWEEP”. This also appears on the
“LAB” screen and its function is identical. Being coloured red, this takes
us to another screen where frequency
sweeps are performed.
If entry to the Sweep screen is from
the Component measure screen, then
the selected active input is Component. If entry is from the LAB screen,
then which ever input was enabled is
active. The LEDs show which input
is selected and this is also shown on
the PC display. “G.Col” scrolls through
the different colours of the graph plot.
“Print” prints the graph to the printer.
Toggle “.Xlin.” and “.Xlog.” selects
either linear frequency sweep from
the pre-selected start frequency with
a selected frequency increment, or a
full log frequency sweep from 10Hz
to 20kHz. To save a project, click on
*SAVE and to load or delete a previously saved project, select *FILES.
All the parameters associated with
a given project are saved to disc, along
with the sweep data, and if these
parameters are not identical to the
current parameters when loading a
file, a warning of “Parameter Change”
is given. This stops files that have
been created and saved with different
ranges, inputs, etc from creating misleading plots when multiple graphs are
displayed simultaneously. However,
this can be overridden if required.
“* SETUP ” takes us to the last
C2
C16
R1
Accuracy & resolution
C1
C7
C8
CONN1
Fig.5: the component overlay for the boot board. Note that the crystal
and 3-terminal regulator must lay flat on the board.
screen which is used to select printer
options and the start and increment
frequencies for the linear frequency
sweep mode. A printer choice of HP
Deskjet+, Epson 9-pin or Epson 24-pin
emulation in either draft, final, landscape or portrait is available. If HP is
chosen, resolutions of 300, 150, 100 or
75DPI can also be selected which give
different size printouts.
At any time, a screen dump can be
taken by pressing F10. This gives a
different printout to the Print selected
from the Sweep screen which only
This view shows how the two RCA input sockets (DC & AC) are connected to the
front panel board using short lengths of tinned copper wire. Note in particular
how the two earth lugs are connect to the earth pattern on the board.
September 1995 79
C6
C10
1
R14
ZD1
CONN3
VREF
C13
CONN2
C12
-5V
0V
+5V
R15
C11
Boot board
Fig.6: the component overlay for the A-D board. Care must be taken
with the interboard connectors. It must be assembled onto the boot
board before the interboard connectors are soldered in place.
To keep the stray capacitance to a
minimum, when assembled, all the
boards should be cleaned using a
proprietary flux cleaning spray.
The power supply board should be
assembled first, taking note of component polarities and ensuring the
correct positioning of the 3-terminal
regulators. Do not fit the 25-pin D
connector yet. It is also important to
observe the orientation of the connectors CONN1 and CONN4, making
sure the pins face to the outside of the
board. Connectors CONN2 and CONN5
are not used in this project.
Assemble the socket for the AC plugpack into the hole on the back panel
and connect it to the “AC in” connections on the PC board. Solder two
wires into the holes marked “RST”,
and connect them to the reset switch
MIC
S1
R6
R10
CONN1
S1
R46
R45
VR1
C12
1
R11
R12
R13
VR3
R14
R15
VR4
R16
1
C9
R17
IC3
4052
C2
C5
IC2
TL072
0V
C1
R2
VR8
R1
C3
1
C8
VR2
C4
R9
VR9,10
R3
IC1
TL072
SINE OUT
R5
R7
R8
R4
1
XX
C11
A
COMPONENT
B
80 Silicon Chip
D3 R30
D2
1
R31
R32
R33
R34
R35
LEDS ON OTHER
SIDE OF PCB
LED4
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED6
LED7
Q1
DC
LED5
1
C10
AC
S2
1
VR7
R20
R21
R22
R23
R24
C7
R44
C13
R25
R26
R27
R28
R29
C6
0V
IC6
4052
Fig.7: the component overlay for the
front panel board. Note that the LEDs,
sockets and binding post terminals
must line up with the front panel.
IC5
4051
All the PC boards are double sided,
with plated-through holes, screened
component overlays and solder
masks so construction is quite straight
forward. However, it is advisable to
follow the sequence of assembly to
ensure the correct alignment of the
boards, especially the Front PC board.
All resistors are 1% with 4-band codes.
It is a good idea to check each resistor’s
value with a digital multimeter before
it is soldered into place.
IC4
TL072
Construction
R19
R18
VR6 VR5
prints the currently active graph along
with the setup data.
This board should be assembled,
using sockets for all the ICs. Take care
not to overheat the crystal or ceramic
capacitors. The 8-way socket strips are
CONN3 and CONN2 while the 9-way
strip is CONN5. CONN4 is not used.
There are two links on the Boot board
to select the running mode of the processor. On J1, link 2 and 3 to enable
the run from RAM function, and on
J4, link 2 and 3 to select the polarity
of address A000H.
Before inserting any ICs, connect the
6-way cable from the power board to
the Boot board. Power up and check
that +5V is present between pins 40
and 20 on the microprocessor socket.
Switch off and insert all the integrated
circuits, observing correct orientation.
Do not mount the boot PC board into
the case at this stage.
If you are using the Test PC kit, the
Boot and power supply boards can
now be tested. After assembling the
R42
R43
Q2
D1
LED9
R41
R38
R13
R39
LED10
R40
1
D2
D-SINE
IC6
74HC32
IC7
ADC0804
R12
C9
D1
1
R37
C8
IC4
4052
IC7
4051
IC5
74HC574
R36
C14
R6
C7
1
R11
C4
CONN5
VR3
R8
1
1
VR2
R3
C2
after it has been assembled into the
back panel. Apply power and check
the +5V and -5V rails on CONN1 and
check for about +12V to +15V between
+V and 0V on CONN4. If all is correct,
then mount the D connector onto the
back panel and solder the power supply board into place.
Assemble the 3-way and 6-way
interconnecting cables, observing the
correct orientation of the connections.
The way to be sure this is correct is
to place the connectors flat, so that
both ends are facing away from each
other and the location guides on both
connectors are facing up. Then wire
the connectors together with no twists
in the cable.
Q1
R5
IC3
4093
ICI
AD736
R1
R2
C5
R7
CONN1
R4
1
R9
R10
C3
VR1
IC2
TL072
C1
YY
LED8
LED11
LED12
The front panel board is secured using two sets of nuts on the binding post
terminals. Be sure to orient the three potentiometers as shown here and note
that the metal bodies of the pots are all earthed back to the PC board using
tinned copper wire.
test PC board plug the board into the
bus connectors on the Boot PC. The
eight interconnecting pins go to port
P1 on CPU pins 1-8, which is CONN2,
and the 5V supply connects to pin 40
on the 80C3 which is the top pin above
CONN5. Apply power and the LED
connected to pin 1 should flash. Press
the reset switch and the LED should
stop, either on or off, and when the
reset switch is released the flashing
should restart.
If all is well, the CPU, EPROM, reset
and decoding circuitry are functioning
correctly. Power down and connect
Audio Lab to the serial port on your
the PC, using a standard 25-way maleto-female cable.
On the Calibrate/test disc is a program called LABTEST.BAT. Power on
Audio Lab and the same LED will
flash.
Now type LABTEST from A: drive.
A small 8031 machine code program
called “Test.bin” is now being dumped
to the RAM at 9600 baud and the LED
will flash faster. After installation, the
LEDs will flash in order from P1.0 to
P1.7 and an acknowledgment of cor-
rect data transfer will be shown on
the PC. The RAM and Serial interface
have now been tested and the Boot
PC is functioning correctly. If any of
these tests fail, check all components
and the power cables to the boards.
A-to-D board
Assemble this board as normal but
do not insert the IC sockets for IC5,
IC7 or the PC board interconnecting
strips. Connect the 3-way power cable
and disconnect the 6-way cable from
the Boot PC board. When powered up,
check for +5V between pins 16 and 8
on IC4 and -5V between pins 7 and 8 on
IC4. Turn the power off and disconnect
the 3-way power cable.
Gently insert the ends from the
plastic holder on the PC interconnecting strips into the two 8-way PC
interconnecting sockets, CONN3 and
CONN5 on the Boot PC, making sure
they are seated all the way down. Note
that the 8-way connector for CONN5
should start at the second pin down,
leaving the top pin, marked +5, empty.
Carefully position the A-to-D board
and the pins into CONN3 and CONN5
C3
TO S1
RST
OUT
IN
0V
+DC
C4
-5V
0V
+5V
CONN1
CONN4
C1
C2
D2
REG1
D1
REG2
F1
DB25
AC IN
Fig.8: the component overlay for the power supply board. This
carries the 25-pin D socket which mounts to the rear panel.
(on the A-to-D board). Place the nylon
spacers between the two boards in
the holes marked A and C and screw
together, with the nuts on the reverse
of the Boot board.
Now solder the interboard connectors in place and also solder the nuts
to the underside of the Boot board.
The boards can now be disassembled and the remaining IC sockets
soldered in place and the ICs inserted.
The Boot board can now be screwed
into the case.
Carefully line up the A-to-D and
Boot boards and bolt them together as
before and connect the cables from the
power supply to both boards.
Front board assembly
The interconnection between the
A-to-D and Front boards is made via a
16-way cable which is provided ready
assembled and tested. Assemble the
Front PC board but do not insert the
LEDs. The switch is mounted on the
component side with the mounting
nut on the copper side and links made
between the holes adjacent to the relevant connector and the switch. The
DC and AC RCA connectors should
be fixed in place with the solder lug
connectors facing down and slightly
bent out to ease connecting to the Front
board later.
Assemble all the components on
the front panel, using only one nut
on the two binding post terminals,
and noting the orientation of the three
front mounting pots, as shown in the
above photo. Insert, but do not solder,
the 12 LEDs on the copper side of the
board, noting their polarity and colour
which is marked on the PC overlay. Do
not push them too far into the board.
The Front PC is now offered up to the
front panel and held in place with the
September 1995 81
The power supply board (bottom, left) is mounted on the DB25 connector and
is wired to the A-D and Boot boards via 3-way and 6-way cable assemblies. A
16-way cable connects the A-D board to the Front-Panel board.
remaining nuts on the two binding
posts. The nuts should not be tightened but should just secure the board
while allowing some movement and
the switch should line up with the
HIGH/LOW hole.
The LEDs will now line up with the
holes in the front panel and can be
gently pushed through the clearance
holes until they are flush and poking
through the panel. Slightly tighten the
nuts on the binding posts and carefully
solder the LEDs in place.
The front board can now be removed and the ICs inserted.
Reassemble the front board to the
front panel and wire the pots, connectors and the ELEC switch as per the circuit diagram and component overlay
on the PC board, using screened cable
for the Mike connection. Connect the
two earth connectors on the DC and AC
82 Silicon Chip
input connectors together and link to
the 0V terminal on the PC board. Link
the centre connectors of the RCA sockets to their respective points marked
on the board and tighten the nuts on
the two binding posts. They can be
soldered to the board later when the
system has been tested and proved to
be functional.
Calibration
There are a total of 10 multi-turn
Kit Availability
Audio Lab is designed by R.S.K.
Electronics Pty Ltd who hold the
copyrights and sell the complete
kit. Pricing details are shown in
the advertisement elsewhere in
this issue.
pots in the Audio Lab but the calibration is made simple by means of
the software. First, insert the Test/
calibrate disk into the A: drive. Type
install and a direc
tory called C:\
ALAB will be created and the software
copied into this directory. Change
directory to ALAB and type SETUP.
This software steps through all the
procedures involved in calibration,
with a full graphic interface showing
which pots to adjust and the reason
for the calibration.
After calibration is complete, exit
from the program and insert the disc
marked ALAB into the A: drive and
type INSTALL. The full suite of software
will now be copied into C:\ALAB. To
run the software simply type ALAB
from the C:\ALAB directory.
Once you have mastered the simple
menu system you will be able to flip
from screen to screen. You should find
Audio Lab an invaluable addition to
your test equipment.
SC
SILICON
CHIP
If you are seeing a blank page here, it is
more than likely that it contained advertising
which is now out of date and the advertiser
has requested that the page be removed to
prevent misunderstandings.
Please feel free to visit the advertiser’s website:
www.altronics.com.au
September 1995 83
VINTAGE RADIO
By JOHN HILL
An interesting grid bias problem
One of the more interesting aspects of vintage
radio is repairing non-functioning receivers.
As far as I’m concerned, getting them working
again is the most satisfying part of this hobby.
As a person having neither an electrical or electronics trade background,
I have never been properly trained to
do radio repairs. I have developed my
own repair techniques from reading
books, asking others and doing my
own investigations. As a result, there
is a lot I have yet to learn and learning new things helps to maintain my
interest in vintage radio.
Having a limited background makes
one easy prey to any new fault that
comes along and these tricky problems
always remind me of how inexperienced I really am. But perseverance
usually wins and the fault is eventually found and rectified. Solving such
faults is very satisfying.
A recent repair to a mid-1950s
4-valve Radiola produced one of these
mystery faults and it proved to be quite
elusive. Allow me to explain.
A real wreck
This particular receiver was one of
the worst wrecks I have seen for a long
time. It had obviously been stored for
many years in a workshed, judging
by the number of multicoloured paint
splats that were on it. Why people have
to flick their paint brushes at old radios
I will never know!
The little Radiola was filthy and
mouse infested. When the set was
removed from its plastic bag there
remained about a tablespoon full of
The Radiola was a common mid-1950s 4-valve receiver. Considering its filthy
condition when found, it scrubbed up fairly well.
84 Silicon Chip
mouse droppings and other miscellaneous items such as partly eaten
pumpkin seeds, small bones and
other debris. I hate working on sets
like these!
After a thorough clean up, the usual
checkout routine revealed that one of
the oscillator coil windings was open
cir
cuit and the rectifier valve had
almost no emission. As there were
plenty of 6X4s in the valve box, the
weak rectifier wasn’t a problem but
it did arouse a suspicion that there
was something else wrong with the
receiver to reduce the valve’s emission
to such a low level.
Other problems with the old Radiola
were: (1) all the original paper capacitors were still in place; (2) the speaker
grille cloth was a filthy, tattered mess;
and (3) the dial cord was made up of
four different sections of string. As
the knots in the dial cord would not
go around the pulleys, dial movement
was restricted to about one quarter of
its total length of travel. The things
that some people put up with!
An examination of the oscillator
coil revealed that one of its leads had
broken off. If the truth be known, the
wire had most likely been chewed
through by a furry little rodent.
Repairing the oscillator coil was
relatively simple as the broken lead
protruded from the sealing compound
by about two millimetres which
allowed a new lead-out wire to be attached. After reinstalling the repaired
oscillator coil, the set was ready for
a test run, even though the paper
capacitors had not been replaced at
this stage.
The little Radiola fired up straight
away and seemed to be in good tune,
pulling in a number of stations while
using only its built-in aerial.
Regardless of the fact that the set was
performing well, the paper capacitors
RESURRECTION
RADIO
VALVE EQUIPMENT SPECIALISTS
VINTAGE RADIO
• Circuits
• Valves
• All parts
The oscillator coil (centre right) needed repairing because of a broken lead-out
wire. The volume control (left) also required attention as it was noisy.
• Books
Fully restored radios for sale
ALL TYPES AND BRANDS OF
AUDIO VALVES IN STOCK
Send SSAE for Catalogue
Visit our Showroom at
242 Chapel Street (PO Box
2029) PRAHRAN, VIC 3181
Tel: (03) 9510 4486; Fax (03) 9529 5639
Silicon Chip Binders
Replacing the electrolytic and paper capacitors had little effect on performance.
However, leaving them in service is only asking for trouble later on.
were replaced with modern polyester
types, which seemed to make little
difference. Then the rot set in!
Distorted sound
After the receiver had been working
for a few minutes, the sound gradually became more and more distorted.
What’s more, as the sound distorted,
the high tension dropped from around
200V to 175V.
Leaving the set to cool off for a
while produced a similar result. It
worked perfectly for a few minutes,
then the distor
t ion slowly crept
back. So what appeared at first to be
a simple and straightforward repair
had now developed into one of those
mystery faults.
I suspected a faulty output valve
and so a good secondhand 6BV7 was
substituted for the valve that came
with the receiver. I might add, at this
stage, that both of these valves tested
“GOOD” when checked in a valve
tester.
The result was the same – the set
was OK for a few minutes, then went
into a slow downhill slide until the
sound became quite distorted. It was
time to start thinking!
Distortion is usually associated with
the audio end of a receiver (but not
always) and is often caused by a lack
of grid bias. With this thought in mind,
the back bias circuit that provides
the bias voltage to the output valve
was checked. The 100Ω bias resistor
seemed OK and nothing could be seen
that looked remotely suspect.
The grid bias on the 6BV7 output
valve should be somewhere around
-4V, taking into account the plate voltage at which the valve was operating.
These beautifully-made binders will
protect your copies of SILICON CHIP.
They are made from a distinctive
2-tone green vinyl & will look great
on your bookshelf.
Price: $A11.95 plus $3 p&p each
(NZ $8 p&p). Send your order to:
Silicon Chip Publications
PO Box 139
Collaroy Beach 2097
Or fax (02) 9979 6503; or ring (02)
9979 5644 & quote your credit card
number.
September 1995 85
increase the bias voltage to -4V and
it did! But the problem remained –
the reception was perfect for a few
minutes and then went into a slow
decline just as before.
An interesting discovery
When testing the faulty valves, only one produced a flicker in the shorts
indicator neon. Testing a valve in a valve tester is only half a test. The other half
is to give it a thorough work-out in a working receiver.
It was at this stage that I made an
interesting discovery. I replaced the
original output valve in its socket
while the set was still operating. The
bias voltage immediately went back
to -4V, stayed there for a short period,
and then started dropping again. I
repeated the operation with the other
valve after it had cooled and the same
thing happened.
The fault was in the valve – both
valves, in fact! They worked OK when
cold but not after they had become hot!
Out came all of the 6BV7s I had in
stock. I selected a new valve and fitted
it to the output socket with vastly different results. The bias voltage settled
on -4V and stayed there!
It was too good an opportunity to
miss out on and all the 6BV7s were
checked in the receiver. Out of the
13 valves tested, six of them had the
diminishing grid bias characteristic.
So, in one hit, my 13 “good” 6BV7
valves were reduced to almost half
that number.
The valve tester
These are the faulty 6BV7 valves. Although they all tested “GOOD” in the valve
tester, they had a problem that deprived the control grid of its negative bias.
They worked OK when cold but not when they became hot.
It seemed an appropriate time to check
out the actual bias voltage.
Grid bias voltages are best checked
with a digital voltmet
er as these
instruments have a very high input
impedance, which has little or no
affect on the function of the receiver.
A cheap analog 2,000Ω/V meter can
seriously affect both the voltage reading and the operation of the receiver
under test.
The receiver was set up with two
voltmeters, one to measure the high
tension voltage and the other the bias
voltage. The bias reading was -3V and
86 Silicon Chip
after this reading had peaked, it went
into reverse and dropped slowly until
it almost reached zero.
And as the bias voltage dropped, so
too did the high tension voltage, due to
the output valve passing increasingly
more current. Distortion did not become apparent until the bias voltage
decreased to about -1V.
Perhaps the bias resistor was faulty?
Maybe its value decreased as it warm
ed up?
Not having a 100Ω resistor on hand
I used a 130Ω resistor as a replacement instead. Hopefully it would
It’s time for the valve tester to enter
our story. I set it up to recheck all the
valves that had failed in the receiver,
even though they had previously
checked out OK in the valve tester.
Of the six faulty valves, only one
could manage to produce a flicker in
the tester’s shorts indicator neon.
This short was on pin number eight
which is the control grid. It would
appear that these valves have a problem when they reach full operating
temperature.
It is worth noting that the four new
valves were all OK. Only the second
hand units produced the diminishing
grid bias characteristic, even though
most of them had emission levels
comparable to new valves.
So there’s something new to ponder
over! Is the 6BV7 a more troublesome
valve compared to other output
valves? And what is the mechanism
of the fault anyway?
Initially, the most likely possibility
seemed to be that the valves were gassy. And a fellow enthusiast suggested
that this could be aggravated by a grid
There’s nothing very exciting about a 4-valve Radiola, as it was a very basic
radio receiver. Note the built-in aerial mounted above the chassis. The valve
line up is as follows: 6BE6, 6AU6, 6BV7 (output) and 6X4 (rectifier).
resistor that had “gone high”, as they
frequently did in those days.
However, these ideas had to be
discounted. All resistors are routinely
checked during restoration and any
found to be out of tolerance are replaced. Also, I took the opportunity
to try these valves in another set and
they behaved identically.
That seemed to further confirm that
the fault was in the valves rather than
in any associated circuits. And the gas
theory seemed to be ruled out by the
fact that there was no violet glow in
the valves, which is characteristic of
this condition.
Another idea which was considered
was a fault known as “silver migration”. It occurred in valves with silver
plated pins, the silver “migrating”
across the glass, particularly between
pins with a high voltage between them.
This idea was also thrown out. For
one thing, the warm-up delay didn’t
seem to fit but, more importantly, the
pins were not silver plated.
Finally, the most likely explanation
would seem to be a condition known
as grid emission. Apparently, this can
occur when the grid becomes coated
with cathode material, generally due
to the heater being overrun for long
periods.
So, perhaps that is the answer. But
the question remains as to whether this
type of valve is prone to this problem.
An unusual valve
Incidentally, for those unfamiliar
with the 6BV7, it is a little unusual
in that it is a duo-diode output pentode. As far as I’m concerned, it is
the only one of its kind and I also
suspect that it is a locally designed
and manufactured valve, as it doesn’t
seem to be mentioned in overseas
valve lists.
Actually, a duo-diode output valve
is a logical type to use in a 4-valve
VINTAGE RADIO SWAP MEET
22nd October 1995
Glenroy Tech School Hall
Melbourne
Admission: $3
Enquiries: (054) 49 3207
radio. If a receiver is to have automatic
gain control and diode detection, then
there have to be diodes somewhere,
so why not have them in the output
valve?
Another mid-1950s 4-valve setup
was to use valves of the duo-diode
RF pentode type (6N8, 6AR7) as an
IF amplifier detector and pass the
resulting audio signal to a standard
output valve such as a 6M5 or 6AQ5.
Looking back on the Radiola repair,
perhaps the most annoying aspect was
the fact that the fault was accurately
diagnosed quite early as being a suspect output valve.
It was ironic (read rotten luck) that
the substitute valve used to check out
this theory happened to have exactly
the same fault!
Anyway, learning new things helps
to maintain my interest in vintage
radio. It is unusual faults like the one
just described and their remedies that
make vintage radio repairs both interesting and challenging.
When I finally learn all there is to
know about valve radio servicing, then
all the fun will have gone out of it for
me. However, as that time seems a long
way off, I’m sure that vintage radio will
continue to hold my interest for many
years to come.
SC
September 1995 87
BOOKSHELF
Servicing Personal Computers
Servicing Personal
Computers, by
Michael Tooley, B.
A. Published 1994 by
Newnes, distributed
by ButterworthHeinemann Australia.
Hard covers, 387
pages, 240 x 170mm,
ISBN 0-750-61757-8.
Price $68.95.
In this age of personal computers
(or PCs as they have become known),
many users, while not necessarily
wanting to repair their own, will be
keen to have a better understanding of
the “innards” of their computer. This
book will certainly enlighten them.
The first of the eight chapters in this
book begins with an introduction to
microprocessors, detailing the different modules that make up a typical
computer. It then goes on to discuss
the evolution of the home computer,
beginning with the release of the 4004,
a 4-bit processor, by Intel in 1971.
Subsequent processors of note are then
listed, through to the Intel 80486 and
Motorola 68030.
A couple of pages are then devoted
to a discourse on programming, mentioning both assembly and high-level
languages.
RAM (Random Access Memory)
is then covered in some detail, after
which brief details are given of keyboards, serial I/O (input/output), RS232 interfaces, raster scan displays and
finally SCSI (Small Computer Systems
Interface) controllers.
The second chapter covers the selection of a suitable workshop site and
the consideration that should be given
to work
benches, storage, lighting,
88 Silicon Chip
security and safety. A list of the basic
tools required for competent service
is given along with an extended list,
although I believe that every workshop
should consider the extended list to be
the minimum.
Tooley then gives a list of the minimum test equipment which would
be required to set up a workshop with
adequate facilities, then an extended
list which would add many dollars
to the cost.
A short discussion follows on the
methods of using multimeters, oscilloscopes, logic probes, logic pulsers
and logic analysers.
Chapter three covers general fault
diagnosis at three levels: basic, intermediate and advanced. Basic level
skills are defined as being able to
locate blown fuses, faulty cables or
failed hard disc drives. Intermediate
skills would allow the technician to
locate intermittent connectors, faulty
discrete components or a failed processor. Those possessing advanced skills
would be able to locate intermittent
problems, temperature faults and bus
conflicts.
The balance of the chapter is devot-
ed to fault finding techniques for the
CPU (Central Processing Unit), video
circuits and RS-232 interface.
Chapter four introduces the reader
to tape and disc drives. Some of this
material is rather antiquated (tape
recorders using Kansas City recording
standards) but if one is to make a living
servicing computers, this knowledge
could be useful.
The evolution of floppy discs is
traced from the 8-inch though the 5.25inch to the current 3.5-inch types. As
well, technical information is listed
for a number of popular drives. The
author then gives a description of the
original IBM 8-inch format, which is
still the basis for formatting current
floppy discs. Details of several floppy
disc controllers are included as well as
methods of fault diagnosis for floppy
disc drives.
The balance of this chapter is devoted to hard disc drives, including
formatting, partitioning and the use
of the DOS FDISK program.
Chapter five is devoted to printers,
which, being mechani
cal devices,
require routine maintenance to keep
them operating at peak performance.
The author introduces dot matrix
printers and explains how the print
head actually prints a character, then
lists the sensing mechanisms needed
to keep track of the head position. A
two-page table of dot matrix printer
faults and repair procedures follows.
A few lines are then devoted to the
operation of laser printers and details
of the self-test procedures which
should be carried out to determine
the cause of any failure. Routine main
tenance and a one-page fault finding
guide complete this chapter.
“Displays” is the title for chapter six,
which surprisingly only covers raster
scan displays. A raster scan is one that
uses a cathode ray tube and deflection coils to move the electron beam
across the face of the tube, as distinct
SILICON CHIP SOFTWARE
Now available: the complete index to all
SILICON CHIP articles since the first issue
in November 1987. The Floppy Index
comes with a handy file viewer that lets
you look at the index line by line or page
by page for quick browsing, or you can
use the search function. All commands
are listed on the screen, so you’ll always
know what to do next.
Notes & Errata also now available:
this file lets you quickly check out the
Notes & Errata (if any) for all articles published in SILICON CHIP. Not an index
but a complete copy of all Notes & Errata text (diagrams not included). The file
viewer is included in the price, so that you can quickly locate the item of interest.
The Floppy Index and Notes & Errata files are supplied in ASCII format on a
3.5-inch or 5.25-inch floppy disc to suit PC-compatible computers. Note: the File
Viewer requires MSDOS 3.3 or above.
ORDER FORM
PRICE
❏
Floppy Index (incl. file viewer): $A7
❏
Notes & Errata (incl. file viewer): $A7
❏
Alphanumeric LCD Demo Board Software (May 1993): $A7
❏
Stepper Motor Controller Software (January 1994): $A7
❏
Gamesbvm.bas /obj /exe (Nicad Battery Monitor, June 1994): $A7
❏
Diskinfo.exe (Identifies IDE Hard Disc Parameters, August 1995): $A7
❏
Computer Controlled Power Supply Software (Jan/Feb. 1997): $A7
❏
Spacewri.exe & Spacewri.bas (for Spacewriter, May 1997): $A7
❏
I/O Card (July 1997) + Stepper Motor Software (1997 series): $A7
POSTAGE & PACKING: Aust. & NZ add $A3 per order; elsewhere $A5
Disc size required: ❏ 3.5-inch disc
❏ 5.25-inch disc
TOTAL $A
Enclosed is my cheque/money order for $A__________ or please debit my
Bankcard ❏ Visa Card ❏ MasterCard
❏
Card No.
Signature_______________________________ Card expiry date______/______
Name ___________________________________________________________
PLEASE PRINT
Street ___________________________________________________________
Suburb/town ________________________________ Postcode______________
Send your order to: SILICON CHIP, PO Box 139, Collaroy, NSW 2097; or fax your
order to (02) 9979 6503; or ring (02) 9979 5644 and quote your credit card number
(Bankcard, Visa Card or MasterCard).
✂
from LCD and other newer solid state
displays. Tooley starts by explaining
the requirements for a video monitor
and the reasons why a normal TV set
is unsatisfactory.
This is followed up with a block
diagram of a monochrome monitor.
He continues with details of the colour
shadow mask tube and the procedure
for making colour adjustments. The
chapter concludes with two pages of
display faults and their cures.
Chapter seven covers servicing of
68000 based microcomputers. Computers that use this chip include the
Apple Macintosh, the Sinclair QL, the
Atari ST and the Commodore Amiga.
The section devoted to each of these
products includes a block diagram
of the computer, a memory map and
details of upgrades or modifications
recommended by the respective manufacturers.
The final chapter is about servicing
the IBM and compatible PCs. It starts
with a brief description of the original
IBM XT and works through to the PS/2
80. While the chapter mainly covers
IBM machines, the Amstrad PC1640
block diagram and other details are
included.
Details and pin connections of
the 8087 maths co-processor, the
8273A DMA (Direct Memory Access) controller and the 8253 (PIT)
programmable interval timer, as well
as several other important chips, are
given, along with a Qbasic program
to test whether a co-processor is fitted
to the PC board.
The memory terminology for PCs is
explained as well as the function of the
CMOS RAM and the BIOS (Basic Input
Output System) ROM. The chapter
continues with a description of the
evolution of the PC bus and concludes
with details of the video modes and
colours available with each mode.
A reference section of some 40 pages
concludes this book, containing information on commonly used symbols,
RAM data, character sets, power on self
test and seven other useful summaries.
To conclude, a very interesting
book which covers all aspects of PCs,
from basics to quite advanced fault
finding. Our copy came from Butterworth-Heinemann Australia, PO Box
5577, West Chatswood, NSW 2067.
Copies can be obtained from SILICON
CHIP. The ordering details are shown
in the SILICON CHIP Bookshop advertisement in this issue.
SC
September 1995 89
NICS
O
R
T
2223
LEC
PC CONTROLLED PROGRAMMABLE POWER
SWITCH MODULE
This
module is a four channel programmable
W
0
S
1
N
9
,
driver
for
high
power relays. It can be used in
7
y
le
70
any application which requires algorithm control
9, Oat Fax (02) 5
rd
8
a
x
C
o
for high power switching. This module can work
Visa
PO B 579 4985
as a programmable power on/off switch to limit
fax
a rd ,
)
&
C
2
0
e
(
r
unauthorised access to equipment where the
n
e
e
o
t
n
s
h
:
o
s
a
p
r
h
P
access to use or change parameters is critical.
, M
ith
rde
d
o
w
r
a
d
d
c
e
This module can also be used as a universal
B a n k x accepte most mix 0. Orders
timer. The timer software application is ine
r
1
o
m
$
f
A
)
cluded with the module. Using this software
l
i
P
a
&
&
m
r
the operator can program the on/off status
(ai
s. P
t
r
Z
e
e
N
n
d
.
r
;
of four independent devices in a period of
o
rld
$10
o
w
4
$
<at>
a week within an accuracy of 10 minutes.
.
tley
a
Aust
o
:
The module can be controlled through
L
I
A
M
the Centronics or RS232 port. The computer is opto
by E
isolated from the unit, to ensure no damage can occur to
the computer. Although the relays included are designed for
240V operation, they have not been approved by the electrical
LEARNING - UNIVERSAL REMOTE CONTROL
authorities for attachment to the mains. Power consumption
These Learning IR Remote Controls can be used to replace
is 7W. Main module: 146 x 53 x 40mm. Display panel: 146
up to eight dedicated IR Remote Controls: $45
x 15mm. We supply: two fully assembled and tested PCBs
(main plus control panel), four relays (each with 3 x 10A /
NEW CATALOGUE AT OUR WEB SITE
240V AC relay contacts), and software on 3.5" disk. We do
We have combined efforts with DIY ELECTRONICS (a Hong
not supply a casing or front panels.
Kong based company) in producing a WEB SITE on the
$92 (Cat G20)
INTERNET. At this site you can view and download a text
version of both of our latest catalogues and other up to date
3.5 DIGIT LCD PANEL METER
information. Email orders can also be placed through here.
200mV full scale input sensitivity, “1999” count, 9 to 12V
The combined effort means that you get offered an extensive
<at> 1mA operation, decimal point selectable (with jumper
range of over 200 high quality, good value kits, and many
wire), 13mm figure height, auto polarity indicator, overrange
more interesting components and items. The range of kits
indication, 100Mohm input resistance, 0.5% accuracy, 2 to
offered includes simple to more advanced kits, and they cover
3 readings per second. With bezel and faceplate. Dimensions:
a very wide field of applications: educational, experimental,
68 x 44mm. Use in instrumentation projects.
EPROM, microprocessor, computer, remote control, high
$27 (Cat D01)
voltage, gas and diode lasers, night vision etc. We’ll leave it
to you to do the exploring at:
CCD CAMERA-VCR SECURITY SYSTEM
http://www.hk.super.net/~diykit
This kit plus ready made PIR detector module and “learning
You can also request us to send you a copy of our FREE
remote control” combination can trigger any domestic IR
catalogue with your next order.
remote controlled VCR to RECORD human activity within
a 6M range and with an 180 deg. angle of view!. Starts
HELIUM-NEON LASER BARGAIN
VCR recording at first movement and ceases recording
Helium neon 633nM red laser heads (ie tubes sealed in
a few minutes after the last movement has stopped; just
a tubular metal case with an inbuilt ballast resistor) that
like commercial CCD-VIDEO RECORDING systems costing
were removed from equipment that is less than 5 years
thousands of dollars!! CCD camera not supplied. No conold. These are suitable for light shows. Output power is in
nection is required to your existing domestic VCR as the
the range of 2.5-7.5mW. Heads are grouped according to
system employs an “IR learning remote control”: $90 for
output power range. Dimensions of the head are 380mm
an PIR detector module, plus control kit, plus a suitable
long and 45mm diameter. Weight: 0.6kg. A special high
“lR learning remote” control and instructions: $65 when
voltage supply is required to operate these heads. With
purchased in conjunction with our CCD camera. Previous
each tube we will include our 12V universal laser power
CCD camera purchasers may claim the reduced price with
supply kit MkIV (our new transformers don’t fail). Warning:
proof of purchase.
involves high voltage operation at a very dangerous energy
level. SUPER SPECIAL:
FLUORESCENT LIGHTING SPECIAL
$80 for a 2.5-4.0mW tube and supply. (Cat L01)
A 12V-350V DC-DC converter (with larger MOSFETS) plus a
$130 for a 4.0-6.5mW tube and supply. (Cat L02)
dimmable mains operated HF ballast. This pair will operate a
This combination will require a source of 12V <at> at least
32-40W fluorescent tube from a 12V battery: very efficient.
2.0A. A 12V gel battery or car battery is suitable, or if 240V
See June 95 EA: $36 for the kit plus the ballast.
operation is required our Wang computer power supply (cat
number P01) is ideal. Our SPECIAL PRICE for the Wang power
STEREO SPEAKER SETS
supply when purchased with matching laser head/inverter
A total of four speakers to suit the making of two 2-way
kit is an additional $10.
speakers (stereo). The bass-midrange speakers are of good
quality, European made, with cloth surround, as used in
LASER WARNINGS:
upmarket stereo televisions, rectangular, 80 x 200mm. The
1. Do not stare into laser beams; eye damage will result.
tweeters are good quality cone types, square, 85 x 85mm.
2. Laser tubes use high voltage at dangerous energy levels;
Two woofers and two tweeters: $16.
be aware of the dangers.
3. Some lasers may require licensing.
NEW: PHOTOGRAPHIC KITS
SLAVE FLASH: very small, very simple, very effective.
ARGON-ION HEADS
Triggers remote flashes from camera’s own flash to fill in
Used Argon-Ion heads with 30-100mW output in the blueshadows. Does not false trigger and it is very sensitive. Can
green spectrum. Head only supplied. Needs 3Vac <at> 15A
even be used in large rooms. PCB and components kit: $7.
for the filament and approx 100Vdc <at> 10A into the driver
SOUND ACTIVATED FLASH: adapted from ETI Project
circuitry that is built into the head. We provide a circuit for a
514. Adjustable sensitivity & delay enable the creation
suitable power supply the main cost of which is for the large
of some fascinating photographs. Has LED indicator that
transformer required: $170 from the mentioned supplier.
makes setting up much easier. PCB, components, plus
Basic information on power supply provided. Dimensions:
microphone: $13.
35 x 16 x 16cm. Weight: 5.9kg. 1 year guarantee on head.
Price graded according to hours on the hour meter.
SINGLE CHANNEL UHF WITH CENTRAL LOCKING
Argon heads only, 4-8 thousand hours: $350 (Cat L04)
Our single channel UHF receiver kit has been updated to
Argon heads only, 8-13 thousand hours: $250 (Cat L05)
provide provision for central locking!! Key chain Tx has
SAW resonator locked, see SC Dec 92. Compact receiver
GEIGER COUNTER AND GEIGER TUBES
has prebuilt UHF receiver module, and has provision for two
These ready made Geiger counters detect dangerous Beta and
extra relays for vehicle central locking function. Kit comes
Gamma rays, with energy levels between 30keV and 1.2MeV.
with two relays. $36. Additional relays for central locking $3
Audible counts output, also a red LED flashes. Geiger tube
ea. Single ch transmitter kit $18.
unplugs from main unit. To measure and record the value of
nuclear radiation level the operator may employ a PC which is
MASTHEAD AMPLIFIER SPECIAL
connected to the detector through the RS232 interface. This
High performance low noise masthead amplifier covers
gives a readout, after every 8 counts, of the time between each
VHF-FM UHF and is based on a MAR-6 IC. Includes two
count. Main unit is 70 x 52 x 35 mm. Geiger tube housing
PCBs, all on-board components. For a limited time we will
unit is 135mm long and is 20mm diameter. Power from 12
also include a suitable plugpack to power the amplifier from
to 14V AC or DC.
mains for a total price of:
$75 (Cat G17)
$25
EY
OATL
E
90 Silicon Chip
CCD CAMERA
Very small PCB CCD Camera including auto iris lens: 0.1Lux,
320K pixels, IR responsive, has 6 IR LEDs on PCB. Slightly
bigger than a box of matches!:
$180
VISIBLE LASER DIODE KIT
A 5mW/670nM visible laser diode plus a collimating lens,
plus a housing, plus an APC driver kit (Sept 94 EA).
UNBELIEVABLE PRICE: $40
Suitable case and battery holder to make pointer as in EA
Nov 95 $5 extra.
12V-2.5 WATT SOLAR PANEL KITS
These US made amorphous glass solar panels only need
terminating and weather proofing. We provide clips and
backing glass. Very easy to complete. Dimensions: 305 x
228mm, Vo-c: 18-20V, Is-c: 250mA. SPECIAL REDUCED
PRICE:
$20 ea. or 4 for $60
A very efficient switching regulator kit is available: Suits
12-24V batteries, 0.1-16A panels, $27. Also available is a
simple and efficient shunt regulator kit, $5.
SOLID STATE “PELTIER EFFECT” DEVICES
We have reduced the price of our peltiers! These can be used
to make a solid state thermoelectric cooler/heater. Basic
information supplied:
12V-4.4A PELTIER: $25
We can also provide two thermal cut-out switches, and a
12V DC fan to suit either of the above, for an additional
price of $10.
BATTERY CHARGER
Simple kit which is based on a commercial 12 hour mechanical timer switch which sets the battery charging period
from 0 to 12 hrs. Timer clock mechanism is wound-up and
started by turning the knob to the desired time setting. Linear
dial with 2 hrs timing per 45 degrees of rotation, eg, 270
deg. rotation for 12 hr. setting. The contacts on the timer
are used to switch on a simple constant current source.
Employs a power transistor and 5 additional components.
Can easily be “hard wired”.
We supply a circuit, a wiring diagram, and tables showing
how to select the charging current: changing one resistor
value. Ideal for most rechargeable batteries. As an example
most gel cells can be charged at a current which is equal
to the battery capacity rating divided by 5-10. Therefore if
you have a discharged gel cell that has 5Ah capacity and
are using a charge current of 0.5A, the timer should be set
for about 10 hours: Or 5hrs. <at> 500mA.
This circuit is suitable for up to approximately 5A, but
additional heatsinking would be required at currents greater
than 2A. Parts and instructions only are supplied in this
kit. Includes a T-03 mini fin heatsink, timer switch, power
transistor and a few other small components to give you
a limited selection of charge current. You will also need a
DC supply with an output voltage which is greater by about
2V than the highest battery voltage you need to charge. As
an example a cheap standard car battery charger could be
used as the power source to charge any chargeable battery
with a voltage range of 0-15V:
$12 (K72)
COMPUTER CONTROLLED
STEPPER MOTOR DRIVER KIT
This kit will drive two 4, 5, 6 or 8 wire stepper motors
from an IBM computer parallel port. The motors require a
separate power supply (not included). A detailed manual on
the computer control of motors plus circuit diagrams and
descriptions are provided. Software is also supplied, on a
3.5" disk. PCB: 153 x 45mm. Great low cost educational
kit. We provide the PCB and all on-board components
kit, manual, disk with software, plus two stepper motors
of your choice for a special price. Choose motors from
M17/M18/M35.
$44 (K21)
Kit without motors is also available: $32
MOTOR SPEED CONTROLLER PCB
Simple circuit controls small DC powered motors which
take up to around 2 amps. Uses variable duty cycle
oscillator controlled by trimpot. Duty cycle is adjustable
from almost 0-100%. Oscillator switches P222 MOSFET.
PCB: 46 x 28mm.
$11 (K67)
For larger power motors use a BUZ11A MOSFET: $3.
FM TX MK 3
This kit has the most range of our kits (to around 200m).
Uses a pre-wound RF coil. The design limits the deviation,
so the volume control on the receiver will have to be set
higher than normal. 6V operation only, at approx 20mA.
PCB: 46 x 33mm:
$18 (K33)
LOW COST IR ILLUMINATOR
Illuminates night viewers or CCD cameras using 42 of our
880nm/30mW/12 degrees IR LEDs. Power output (and
power consumption) is variable, using a trimpotentiometer.
Operates from 10 to 15V and consumes from 5mA up to 0.6A
(at maximum power). The LEDs are arranged into 6 strings
of 7 series LEDs with each string controlled by an adjustable
constant current source. PCB: 83 x 52mm:
$40 (K36)
VHF MODULATOR FOR B/W CAMERAS
(To be published, EA) Simple modulator which can be
adjusted to operate between about channels 7 and 11 in
the VHF TV band. This is designed for use in conjunction
with monochrome CCD cameras to give adequate results
with a cheap TV. The incoming video simply directly
modulates the VHF oscillator. This allows operation with
a TV without the necessity of connecting up wires, if not
desired, by simply placing the modulator within about
50cm from the TV antenna. Suits PAL and NTSC systems.
PCB: 63 x 37mm:
$12 (K63)
SOUND FOR CCD CAMERAS/UNIVERSAL AMPLIFIER
(To be published, EA). Uses an LM386 audio amplifier IC
and a BC548 pre-amp. Signals picked up from an electret
microphone are amplified and drives a speaker. Intended for
use for listening to sound in the location of a CCD camera
installation, but this kit could be used as a simple utility
amplifier. Very high audio gain (adjustable) makes this unit
suitable for use with directional parabolic reflectors etc.
PCB: 63 x 37mm:
$10 (K64)
LOW COST 1 to 2 CHANNEL UHF REMOTE CONTROL
(To be published, SC) A single channel 304MHz UHF remote
control with over 1/2 million code combinations, which
also makes provision for a second channel expansion. The
low cost design has a 2A relay contact output. The 1ch
transmitter (K41) can be used to control one channel of
the receiver. To access the second channel when another
transmitter is purchased, the other transmitter is coded
differently. Alternatively, the 3ch transmitter kit (K40)
as used with the 4ch receiver kit is compatible with this
receiver and allows access to both channels from the one
transmitter. Note that the receiver uses two separate decoder
ICs. This receiver operates from 10 to 15Vdc. Range is up
to about 40m. 1ch Rx kit:
$22 (K26)
Expansion components (to convert the receiver to 2 channel
operation; extra decoder IC and relay): $6
ONE CHANNEL UHF TRANSMITTER
AX5326 encoder. Transmit frequency adjustable by trimcap.
Centred around 304MHz. Powered from 12V lighter battery.
LED flashes when transmitting. Size of transmitter case: 67
x 30 x 13 mm. This kit is trickier to assemble than the 3ch
UHF transmitter:
$11 (K41)
THREE CHANNEL UHF TRANSMITTER
The same basic circuit as the 1ch transmitter. Two buttons,
allows up to 3 channel operation. Easier to assemble than
the 1ch transmitter and has slightly greater range. Size of
transmitter case: 54 x 36 x 15mm:
$18 (K40)
ULTRASONIC RADAR
Ref: EA Oct 94. This unit is designed to sound a buzzer
and/or operate a relay when there is an object at a preset
distance (or less) away. The distance is adjustable from
200mm to around 2.5 metres. Intended as a parking aid
in a car or truck, also may be used as an aid for the sight
impaired, warning device when someone approaches a
danger zone, door entry sensor. PCB: 92 x 52mm. PCB,
all on-board components kit plus ultrasonic transducers
(relay included):
$22 (K25)
Optional: buzzer $3, plastic box $4.
SIREN USING SPEAKER
Uses the same siren driver circuit as in the “Protect anything alarm kit”, kit number K18. 4" cone/8 ohm speaker
is included. Generates a really irritating sound at a sound
pressure level of 95dB <at> 1m. Based around a 40106 hex
Schmitt trigger inverter IC. One oscillator modulates at
1Hz another oscillator, between 500Hz and 4KHz. Current
consumption is about 0.5A at 12V. PCB: 46 x 40mm. As a
bonus, we include all the extra PCBs as used in the “Protect
anything alarm kit”.
$12 (K71)
PLASMA BALL
Ref: EA Jan 94. This kit will produce a fascinating colourful
changing high voltage discharge in a standard domestic light
bulb. The EHT circuit is powered from a 12V to 15V supply
and draws a low 0.7A. Output is about 10kV AC peak. PCB:
130 x 32mm. PCB and all the on-board components (flyback
transformer included), and the instructions:
$28 (K16)
We do not supply the standard light bulb or any casing. The
prototype supply was housed in a large coffee jar, with the
lamp mounted on the lid. Hint: connect the AC output to
one of the pins on a fluorescent tube or a non-functional
but gassed laser tube. Large non-functional laser tube or
tube head: $10
ELECTROCARDIOGRAM PCB + DISK
The software disk and a silk screened and solder masked
PCB (PCB size: 105 x 53mm) for the ECG kit published in
EA July 95. No further components supplied:
$10 (K47)
TOMINON HIGH POWER LENS
These 230mm (1:4.5) lens have never been used. They
contain six coated glass lenses, symmetric, housed in a
black aluminium case. Scale range is from 1:10 through to
1:1 to 10:1. Weight: 1.6kg. Applications include high quality
image projection at macro scales, and portrait photography
in large formats:
$45 (Cat O14)
PROJECTION LENS
Brand new, precision angled projection lens. Overall size is
210 x 136mm. Weight: 1.3kg. High-impact lexan housing
with focal length adjustment lever. When disassembled,
this lens assembly yields three 4" diameter lenses (concave,
convex-concave, convex-convex). Limited quantity:
$35 (Cat O15)
INTENSIFIED NIGHT VIEWER KIT
Reference article: Silicon Chip Sept 94. See in the dark!
Make your own 3 stage first generation night scope that
will produce good vision in starlight illumination! Uses
3 of the above fibre optic tubes bonded together. These
tubes have superior gain and resolution to Russian
viewers. 25mm size tube only weighs 390g. 40mm size
tube only weighs 1.1kg. We supply a three stage fibre
optically coupled image intensifier tube, EHT power supply
kit which operates from 6 to 12V, and sufficient plastics
to make a monocular scope. The three tubes are already
bonded together:
$270 for the 25mm version (Cat N04)
$300 for the 40mm version (Cat N05)
We can also supply a quality Peak brand 10x “plalupe” for
use as an eyepiece which suits all the above 25 and 40mm
windowed tubes well: $18
35mm camera lenses or either of the Russian objective
lenses detailed under “Optical” suit these tubes quite well.
IR “TANK” TUBE/SUPPLY KIT
These components can be the basis of a very responsive
infra red night viewer; the exact construction of which we
leave up to you. The new IR tube is as used in older style
military tank viewers. The tube employed is probably the most
sensitive IR responsive tube we have ever supplied. Responds
well even to 940nm LED illumination. The resultant viewer
requires IR illumination, as without this it will otherwise only
“see” a little bit better than the naked eye. Single tube, first
generation. Screen diameter: 18mm. Tube length 95mm.
Diameter: 55mm. Weight: 100g. Tube can be operated up
to about 15kV. Our miniature night viewer power supply (kit
number K52) is supplied with its instructions included. Only
very basic ideas for construction of viewer is provided. Tube
and the power supply kit only:
$80 (Cat N06)
RUSSIAN SCOPE KIT
Our hybrid Russian/Oatley kit design makes this the pick of
the Russian scopes in this price range! We supply a fully
assembled Russian compact scope housing containing the
intensifier tube, adjustable eyepiece and objective lens.
Housing is made from aluminium. The objective lens is
fixed in focus, but it is adjustable after loosening a grub
screw. We also include the night viewer power supply kit
(kit number K52) and a small (84 x 55 x 32mm) jiffy box to
house the supply in. The box must be attached by you to the
scope housing. Operates from a 9V battery. This scope has a
useful visible gain but is difficult to IR illuminate satisfactorily.
Length of scope is 155mm:
$290 (Cat N07)
LASER POINTER
A complete brand new 5mW/670nM pointer in a compact
plastic case (75 x 42 x 18mm) with a key chain. Features
an automatic power control circuit (APC) which is similar
to our kit number K35 & our laser diode module’s circuit.
Battery life: 10 hours of operation. Powered by two 1.5V N
type batteries (included). This item may require licensing:
$80 (Cat L08)
MAGNETIC CARD READER
Commercial cased unit that will read some information
from most plastic cards, needs 8 to 12V DC supply such
as a plugpack. Draws about 400mA. Power input socket is
2.5mm DC power type. Weight: 850g. 220 x 160 x 45mm:
$70 (Cat G05)
400 x 128 LCD DISPLAY MODULE - HITACHI
These are silver grey Hitachi LM215 dot matrix displays.
They are installed in an attractive housing. Housing dimensions: 340 x 125 x 30mm. Weight: 1.3kg. Effective display
size is 65 x 235mm. Basic data for the display is provided.
Driver ICs are fitted but require an external controller. New,
unused units.
$25 ea. (Cat D02) 3 for $60
VISIBLE LASER DIODE MODULES
Industrial quality 5mW/670nM laser diode modules. Consists
of a visible laser diode, diode housing, driver circuit, and
collimation lens all factory assembled in one small module.
Features an automatic power control circuit (APC) driver,
so brightness varies little with changes in supply voltage
or temperature. Requires 3 to 5V to operate and consumes
approx 50mA. Note: 5V must not be exceeded and there
must be no ripple on the power supply, or the module may
be instantly destroyed. These items may require licensing.
We have two types:
1. Overall dimensions: 11mm diameter by 40mm long. Driver
board is heatshrinked onto the laser housing assembly. Collimating lens is the same as used in the above laser pointer,
and our visible laser diode kit: $55 (Cat L09)
2. Overall dimensions: 12mm diameter by 43mm long.
Assembled into an anodised aluminium casing. This module
has a superior collimating optic. Divergence angle is less than
1milliradian. Spot size is typically 20mm in diameter at 30
metres: $65 (Cat L10)
This unit may also be available with a 635nm Laser Diode
fitted.
FLUORESCENT LIGHT HIGH FREQUENCY BALLASTS
European made, new, “slim line” cased, high frequency
(HF) electronic ballasts. They feature flicker free starting,
extended tube life, improved efficiency, no visual flicker
during operation (as high frequency operation), reduced
chance of strobing with rotating machinery, generate no
audible noise and generate much reduced radio frequency
interference compared to conventional ballasts.
The design of these appears to be similar to the one published in the October 1994 issue of Silicon Chip magazine,
in that a high frequency sine wave is used, although these
are much more complex. Some models include a dimming
option which requires either an external 100K potentiometer
or a 0-10V DC source. Some models require the use of a
separate filter choke (with dimensions of 16 x 4 x 3.2cm);
this is supplied where required. We have a limited stock of
these and are offering them at fraction of the cost of the
parts used in them!
Type A: 1 x 16W tube, not dimmable, no filter,
44 x 4 x 3.5cm: $20
Type B: 1 x 16W tube, dimmable, filter used,
43 x 4 x 3cm: $26
Type C: 1 x 18W tube, not dimmable, no filter,
28 x 4 x 3cm: $20
Type D: 2 x 32W or 36W tubes, dimmable, no filter,
43 x 4 x 3cm: $26
Type E: 2 x 32W tubes, not dimmable, no filter,
44 x 4 x 3.5cm: $22
Type F: 1 x 32W or 36W tube, not dimmable, no filter, 34
x 4 x 3cm: $20
Type G: 1 x 36W tube, not dimmable, filter used,
28 x 4 x 3cm: $20
Type H: 1 x 32W or 36W tube, dimmable, filter used, 44
x 4 x 3.5cm: $20
(Cat G09, specify type).
CYCLE/VEHICLE COMPUTERS
BRAND NEW SOLAR POWERED MODEL! Intended for
bicycles, but with some ingenuity these could be adapted
to any moving vehicle that has a rotating wheel. Could
also be used with an old bicycle wheel to make a distance
measuring wheel. Top of the range model. Weather and
shock resistant. Functions: speedometer, average speed,
maximum speed, tripmeter, odometer, auto trip timer, scan,
freeze frame memory, clock.
Programmable to allow operation with almost any wheel
diameter. Uses a small spoke-mounted magnet, with a Hall
effect switch fixed to the forks which detects each time the
magnet passes. Hall effect switch is linked to the small main
unit mounted on the handlebars via a cable. Readout at main
unit is via an LCD display. Main unit can be unclipped from
the handlebar mounting to prevent it being stolen, and weighs
only 30g. Max speed reading: 160km/h. Max odometer
reading: 9999km. Maximum tripmeter reading: 999.9km.
Dimensions of main unit: 64 x 50 x 19mm:
$32 (Cat G16)
September 1995 91
PRODUCT SHOWCASE
Protek 505 digital multimeter
has dual display
This Protek 505 digital multimeter has a
large dual digital display plus bar graph, true
RMS readings, memory storage and 4000
count resolution. As well, it will measure
temperature, frequency, capacitance and
inductance.
While all multimeters will perform
voltage, current, resistance and diode
tests, there are not many which can
also measure temperature, frequency,
capacitance, inductance, logic levels
and dBm values. You can also measure
time period for stop watch or alarm
functions and store measured values
in up to nine memory locations. The
Protek 505 also includes a signal generator with three output frequencies
(2048, 4096 and 8192Hz square wave).
Naturally it is autoranging and this can
be overridden if required.
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
has a dual digital readout and bar
graph plus numerous annunciators.
This dual readout allows two measurements to be displayed and measured
at once. For example, when measuring
AUDIO
TRANSFORMERS
Manufactured in Australia
Comprehensive data available
Harbuch Electronics Pty Ltd
9/40 Leighton Pl. HORNSBY 2077
Ph (02) 476-5854 Fx (02) 476-3231
92 Silicon Chip
frequency, the display will show the
reading in Hz on the main display and
the value of AC volts on the secondary
scale. When the time display is selected, this is shown on the secondary
scale with the measured value of volts,
current, temperature or resistance on
the main digits.
There is no skimping on the size
of the display either. The main and
secondary display digits are 19mm
and 9mm high respectively while the
bar graph displays from 0 to 40 with
21 active segments.
The word "active" is used because
the display appears to have 37 segments, however, 16 of these are doubled up so that they are "lit" together.
Knowing this is important for attempting to read the bargraph value. The
bargraph is useful for seeing the trend
of value changes which can be too fast
for the digital display to update. The
display can be backlit for use in dark
locations.
Most of the functions available can
be manipulated to provide maximum,
minimum, average and relative readings. These are accessed using the
menu key. Once this key has been
pressed though, there is no way out;
you are stuck with selecting either
Max, Min, Avg, Rel or Keep On unless power is switched off. We would
prefer to have an Out selection which
restores the meter to provide normal
readings.
The relative (Rel) display is useful
when there is a fixed offset in the
measurement. This can be subtracted
so that only the change is displayed.
Relative readings can also be displayed
as a percentage change from the reference value.
A hold feature freezes the display
at any time so that no further changes
in the reading take place. Readings
can also be placed in memory for a
more permanent storage. There are 9
memories available, labelled 1-9. The
"0" memory location is innactive and
cannot be used for storage. It can be
recalled but it only shows 0000. The
handbook indicates that this memory
location is not useable, however, they
also claim that there are 10 memory
locations! The memory locations are
not erased when the meter turns off in
the auto power off mode.
To prevent the meter from switching
off after 30 minutes of inactivity, a
"keep on " facility is available which
disables the automatic power off.
Naturally, the meter can be turned on
and off at will using a separate push
button switch. The handbook recommends switching off manually rather
than waiting for the automatic power
Optical light sources
& power meter
Tektronix has introduced a
new line of handheld optical test
products that include the TOP130,
TOP140 and TOP150 optical light
sources, the TOP200 power meter
and the TOP300 visual fault finder.
The TOP130 emits at 850/1300nm
and is suitable for testing multimode cable used in LANs and
WANs; the TOP140 laser source
emits at 1310nm and the TOP150 laser source emits at 1550nm. Models
TOP140 and TOP150 are used for
testing single mode cables in Telco
and CATV networks.
All the light sources feature a
off feature. This would be a good idea
since battery life is only about 60 hours
with a carbon zinc battery. Fortunately, a low battery warning indicator is
included so that you will know when
to replace it and a separate battery
compartment is provided allowing
easy access.
Diode readings display the foreward
voltage measured between anode and
cathode on the secondary display.
The main display shows either SHrt
(short), OPEn or Good. These are supposed to tell you whether the diode
is operating correctly. We found that
good Schottky and high speed diodes
universal connector interface for easy
upgrade and cleaning. Battery life is
claimed to be over 100 hours with
standard alkaline batteries.
A companion product to Tektronix
optical light sources is the TOP200
optical power meter. It is a lowcost, palm-size unit that makes the
basic optical power measurements
in either dB or dBm, calibrated at
850nm, 1300nm and 1550nm. This
power meter provides 0.01dB resolution and allows the user to store
reference values for each wavelength
independently.
For further information, contact
Tektronix Australia Pty Ltd, 80 Waterloo Road, North Ryde, NSW 2113.
Phone (02) 887 7066.
gave a "short" indication because their
forward voltage was below 0.5V. The
diode test provides up to 4V and so
LEDs can be tested. The LED will
light up and an open indication will
be given because the forward voltage
of the LED is greater than 1V. Some
discretion must therefore be used
when interpreting the short and open
indications.
Temperature sensing must be done
using a "K" type thermocouple, which
is available as an accessory. The probe
can measure temperature from -20 to
1200 degrees C which is then shown
on the main display. The secondary
September 1995 93
Video magnifier uses
CCD camera
This 1/2" colour CCD high resolution video camera/microscope
provides 10x, 20x and 40x magnification with greater than 450 lines
horizontal resolution.
The SVC-228 offers advantages
over magnifying glasses and other
optical inspection devices. Several
or groups of people can simultaneously observe the image for
discussion; images may be recorded
on a VCR or by using an interface
card stored, in a personal computer
for documentation, manipulation,
measurement or printout.
The SVC-228 comprises a main
unit which houses the power
supply and interface circuitry and
connects via a 2 metre cable to the
camera head.
Optional lenses provide a choice
of magnification. Also available
is an adjustable stand with lamps
display shows the Fahrenheit value.
With no probe connected, the readout will show ambient temperature
and is useful for finding out why you
feel cold (we reviewed this meter in
winter!).
While the meter can read inductance it is restricted values above 10mH
which is a relatively large value in
practice. Most inductances used in RF
and switchmode supplies are much
smaller than this. Note also that if the
Q is less than 10 or the coil resistance
is greater than 100W, then inaccuracies
will result.
Capacitance measurement range is
better, at up to 100µF with a 0.01µF
resolution. This means that you can
measure 10nF and larger up to 99µF.
Audio Lab
for illumination. Applications
include assembly and inspection
of mechanical parts, components,
surface mount devices, printed circuit boards, contacts, connectors,
measurement, quality control and
verification.
For further information contact
Allthings Sales & Services, PO Box
25, Northlands, WA 6021. Phone (09)
349 9413 or fax (09) 344 5905.
We would have preferred to be able
to measure much smaller values than
10nF (.01µF).
The frequency meter mode can be
used for measurement from 1Hz up to
9999MHz with 4 digit resolution. The
input signal for the frequency mode is
a minimum of 1.5V RMS (4.24V p-p).
This is find for CMOS and TTL circuits
but most analog and RF circuits will
need a preamp/buffer for meaningful
measurements.
Incidentally, the meter incorporates
a logic level range which indicates
a logic Hi and logic Lo on the main
display. The in-between voltage where
the logic is indeterminate is indicated
by a "....". Logic voltage is set for TTL
levels and so it is suitable for High
R.S.K. Electronics Pty. Ltd.
Complete Audio Lab kit with PCBs, 1% resistors, PTH screened PCBs, IC sockets,
boot Eprom, screen printed case, 8K RAM, 8031 processor and all ICs.
Includes calibration and Audio Lab V5.1 software
10 VAC 1A plugpack plus socket $18.
2-Metre serial cable $9.
$330 inc. tax.
Processor test kit $15.
Freight $9.
Fully assembled & calibrated complete with plugpack (1-year warranty) $450
5 Ludwig Place, Duncraig, Perth WA 6023
94 Silicon Chip
Phone (09) 448 3787
Speed CMOS as well.
Three output frequencies are
available from the meter. These are
at 8192, 4096 and 2048Hz with a 4V
p-p minimum output. The source impedance is 1.5kW so that it can drive
logic circuitry. Interestingly enough,
the signal swings between -0.7V and
+3.3V. The is indicates that the internal
signal generator must be AC coupled
with a diode clamp to prevent the
negative excursion going beyond one
diode drop.
Timer counting is available for up
to 10 hours with a count rate of one
second. You can count up from zero
to 9Hr 59min 59sec and the alarm will
sound one second after this maximum
count has been reached. The counter
is presettable to any time within this
range. Counting down is also possible. In this case, however, the alarm
sounds one second after 0.00.00 has
been reached.
AC voltage measurement is true
RMS. This means that the correct reading is obtained for waveforms other
than pure sine waves. On a normal
meter without true RMS readings, the
display is calibrated to give a correct
RMS reading only for sine waves.
With true RMS, the reading is essentially correct for other types of waves.
For example, the additional error in
reading compared to the sine wave for
square and triangle waves is 0.2% and
0.3% respectively. For crest factors up
to 2, the additional error is 0.5%. For
accuracy details see the latter part of
this review.
Also on the AC voltage range is
displayed a dBm reading on the secondary display. A reading of 0dBm
means that the voltage is 0.7746V.
This corresponds to 1mW into a 600W
load and all dBm values displayed are
referenced to this level.
Continuity measurements are available with or without a tone. With tone
selected the meter will register an
OPEn condition above 100W and will
show a short otherwise. Without the
tone selected, the meter only shows
the value in ohms.
Accuracy
The Protek 505 has ±0.3% +2 digits
accuracy for the 400mV DC range. For
the 4V to 1000V ranges, the accuracy is
±0.5% +2 digits. AC voltage accuracy
is ±1% +3 digits for the 400mVAC
range from 50Hz to 1kHz. The 4VAC
to 750VAC ranges are ±1.5% +5 digits
accuracy from 50Hz to 100Hz for the 4VAC range and up to
500Hz for the remaining ranges.
Resistance accuracy is ±0.5% +2 digits up to 400kW and
1% +2 digits for ranges above this. DC current accuracy
is ±1% +2 digits and AC current is ±1.5% +3 digits from
50Hz to 100Hz. This rises to ±3% +5 digits from 100Hz
to 1kHz.
Frequency accuracy is ±0.01% ±2 digits. Temperature
accuracy is ±3% +5 digits from -20 to 10 degrees C. It is ±3%
+3 digits from 10 to 350 degrees C. Capacitance accuracy
is ±3% +5 digits and inductance accuracy is the same for
values up to 20H.
The meter is fully protected from over voltage and over
current using fuses and a PTC thermistor. A spare 0.5A fuse
is included inside the case, however, there is no spare 20A
fast blow type included.
The meter is supplied in a vinyl case which also holds
the probe leads and handbook. The probes have two screwon aligator clips for the probe tips which are a worthwhile
inclusion.
In short, the Protek 505 is a lot of meter for the money.
With true RMS measurement, dual display, bar graph and
a host of measurement functions, it will be a popular unit.
It is priced at $229 including tax and is available from Altronics in Perth or from their dealers Australia wide. Phone
1 800 999 007.
Fast response
oxygen probe
Novatech Controls have
developed a fast responding
oxygen sensing probe for flue
gas, furnace and kiln applications. The development
program was in response to
market demands from within
Australia and overseas.
The zirconia sensor has a
response time in the millisecond region but is extended by the time taken to introduce the gas sample from the
process to the sensor. This
total speed of response time can be critical, particularly in
automatic combustion trim systems.
The Novatech development, which was the result of
extensive wind tunnel testing, provides users with a probe
which will respond to changes in the oxygen level of the
sample within four seconds. It has an optional 10 micron
particulate filter for flues with fly ash or other material which
can block up sensing ports.
The benefit to users of fast responding flue gas oxygen
sensing probes is improved trim control of combustion
air/fuel ratio. This means savings in fuel. In some critical
cases where process measurement lag cannot be tolerated,
automatic control may be implemented where it was not
previously possible.
Novatech oxygen probes use advanced zirconia cell technology developed by the CSIRO Division of Materials Science
and Technology. For further information, contact Novatech
Controls (Aust) Pty Ltd, 429 Graham St, Port Melbourne, Vic
3207. Phone (03) 9645 2377 or fax (03) 9646 3027.
KITS-R-US
PO Box 314 Blackwood SA 5051 Ph 018 806794
TRANSMITTER KITS
$49: a simple to build 2.5 watt free running CD level input, FM band runs from 12-24VDC.
•• FMTX1
FMTX2B $49: the best transmitter on the market, FM-Band XTAL locked on 100MHz. CD level input 3
stage design, very stable up to 30mW RF output.
$49: a universal digital stereo encoder for use on either of our transmitters. XTAL locked.
•• FMTX2A
FMTX5 $99: both FMTX2A & FMTX2B on one PCB.
FMTX10
$599:
FMTX5 built and tested, enclosed in a quality case with plugpack, DIN input
•connector for audioa complete
and a 1/2mtr internal antenna, also available in 1U rack mount with balanced cannon
input sockets, dual VU meter and BNC RF $1299. Ideal for cable FM or broadcast transmission over
distances of up to 300 mtrs, i.e. drive-in theatres, sports arenas, football grounds up to 50mW RF out.
FMTX10B $2599: same as rack mount version but also includes dual SCA coder with 67 & 92KHz
subcarriers.
•
AUDIO
Audio Power Amp: this has been the most popular kit of all time with some 24,000 PCBs being
•soldDIGI-125
since 1987. Easy to build, small in size, high power, clever design, uses KISS principle. Manufacturing
rights available with full technical support and PCB CAD artwork available to companies for a small royalty.
200 Watt Kit $29, PCB only $4.95.
AEM 35 Watt Single Chip Audio Power Amp $19.95: this is an ideal amp for the beginner to construct;
uses an LM1875 chip and a few parts on a 1 inch square PCB.
Low Distortion Balanced Line Audio Oscillator Kit $69: designed to pump out line up tone around studio
complexes at 400Hz or any other audio frequency you wish to us. Maximum output +21dBm.
MONO Audio DA Amp Kit, 15 splits: $69.
Universal BALUN Balanced Line Converter Kit $69: converts what you have to what you want, unbalanced
to balanced or vice versa. Adjustable gain. Stereo.
•
•
••
COMPUTERS
I/O Card for PCs Kit $169: originally published in Silicon Chip, this is a real low cost way to interface
•to Max
the outside world from your PC, 7 relays, 8 TTL inputs, ADC & DAC, stepper motor drive/open collector
1 amp outputs. Sample software in basic supplied on disk.
PC 8255 24 Line I/O Card Kit $69, PCB $39: described in ETI, this board is easy to construct with
•onlyIBM3 chips
and a double sided plated through hole PCB. Any of the 24 lines can be used as an input or
output. Good value.
Professional
19" Rack Mount PC Case: $999.
•• All-In-One 486SLC-33
CPU Board $799: includes dual serial, games, printer floppy & IDE hard disk drive
interface, up to 4mb RAM 1/2 size card.
PC104 486SLC CPU Board with 2Mb RAM included: 2 serial, printer, floppy & IDE hard disk $999; VGA
•PC104
card $399.
KIT WARRANTY – CHECK THIS OUT!!!
If your kit does not work, provided good workmanship has been applied in assembly and all original parts
have been correctly assembled, we will repair your kit FREE if returned within 14 days of purchase. Your
only cost is postage both ways. Now, that’s a WARRANTY!
KITS-R-US sell the entire range of designs by Graham Dicker. The designer has not extended his agreement
with the previous distributor, PC Computers, in Adelaide. All products can be purchased with Visa/Bankcard
by phone and shipped overnight via Australia EXPRESS POST for $6.80 per order. You can speak to the
designer Mon-Fri direct from 6-7pm or place orders 24 hours a day on: PH 018 80 6794; FAX 08 270 3175.
Pattern generator for
TV & computer monitors
Obiat Pty Ltd has introduced the Black Star 1410 video
monitor tester, a microprocessor controlled instrument
for aligning and testing computer and TV monitors and
video projectors.
The comprehensive range of line and frame frequencies, together with the variety of rear panel outputs,
ensure compatibility with the majority of computer
monitors.
The Black Star 1410 produces a wide range of test
patterns which includes a testcard, raster, vertical and
horizontal lines, colour bars, checkerboard, dots and a focus function. The selected pattern, system, sync. polarity
and line/frame frequencies are shown on the unit's liquid crystal display. It is suitable for CGA,
MDA, PGA,
VGA, SVGA
and 8514A/
XGA computer displays in
addition to TV
monitors. Factory-programmed versions of the 1410 are
also available.
For more information, contact Obiat Pty Ltd, 129 Queen
Street, Beaconsfield, NSW 2014. Phone (02) 698 4111 or
fax (02) 699 9170.
September 1995 95
Silicon Chip
Supply For Burglar Alarms; Low-Cost 3-Digit Counter Module;
Simple Shortwave Converter For The 2-Metre Band.
October 1990: Low-Cost Siren For Burglar Alarms; Dimming
Controls For The Discolight; Surfsound Simulator; DC Offset
For DMMs; The Dangers of Polychlorinated Biphenyls; Using
The NE602 In Home-Brew Converter Circuits.
BACK ISSUES
September 1988: Hands-Free Speakerphone; Electronic Fish
Bite Detector; High Performance AC Millivoltmeter, Pt.2;
Build The Vader Voice.
April 1989: Auxiliary Brake Light Flasher; What You Need
to Know About Capacitors; 32-Band Graphic Equaliser, Pt.2;
LED Message Board, Pt.2.
May 1989: Build A Synthesised Tom-Tom; Biofeedback
Monitor For Your PC; Simple Stub Filter For Suppressing
TV Interference; LED Message Board, Pt.3; All About Electrolytic Capacitors.
July 1989: Exhaust Gas Monitor (Uses TGS812 Gas Sensor);
Extension For The Touch-Lamp Dimmer; Experimental Mains
Hum Sniffers; Compact Ultrasonic Car Alarm.
September 1989: 2-Chip Portable AM Stereo Radio (Uses
MC13024 and TX7376P) Pt.1; High Or Low Fluid Level Detector; Studio Series 20-Band Stereo Equaliser, Pt.2; Auto-Zero
Module for Audio Amplifiers (Uses LMC669).
October 1989: FM Radio Intercom For Motorbikes Pt.1;
GaAsFet Preamplifier For Amateur TV; 1Mb Printer Buffer;
2-Chip Portable AM Stereo Radio, Pt.2; Installing A Hard
Disc In The PC.
November 1989: Radfax Decoder For Your PC (Displays Fax,
RTTY & Morse); FM Radio Intercom For Motorbikes, Pt.2;
2-Chip Portable AM Stereo Radio, Pt.3; Floppy Disc Drive
Formats & Options; The Pilbara Iron Ore Railways.
December 1989: Digital Voice Board (Records Up To Four
Separate Messages); UHF Remote Switch; Balanced Input &
Output Stages; Data For The LM831 Low Voltage Amplifier
IC; Index to Volume 2.
November 1990: How To Connect Two TV Sets To One VCR;
A Really Snazzy Egg Timer; Low-Cost Model Train Controller;
Battery Powered Laser Pointer; 1.5V To 9V DC Converter;
Introduction To Digital Electronics; Simple 6-Metre Amateur
Transmitter.
January 1990: High Quality Sine/Square Oscillator; Service
Tips For Your VCR; Speeding Up Your PC; Phone Patch For
Radio Amateurs; Active Antenna Kit; Speed Controller For
Ceiling Fans; Designing UHF Transmitter Stages.
December 1990: DC-DC Converter For Car Amplifiers; The Big
Escape – A Game Of Skill; Wiper Pulser For Rear Windows;
A 4-Digit Combination Lock; 5W Power Amplifier For The
6-Metre Amateur Transmitter; Index To Volume 3.
February 1990: 16-Channel Mixing Desk; High Quality
Audio Oscillator, Pt.2; The Incredible Hot Canaries; Random
Wire Antenna Tuner For 6 Metres; Phone Patch For Radio
Amateurs, Pt.2.
January 1991: Fast Charger For Nicad Batteries, Pt.1; Have
Fun With The Fruit Machine; Two-Tone Alarm Module; LCD
Readout For The Capacitance Meter; How Quartz Crystals
Work; The Dangers When Servicing Microwave Ovens.
March 1990: 6/12V Charger For Sealed Lead-Acid Batteries;
Delay Unit For Automatic Antennas; Workout Timer For
Aerobics Classes; 16-Channel Mixing Desk, Pt.2; Using The
UC3906 SLA Battery Charger IC.
February 1991: Synthesised Stereo AM Tuner, Pt.1; Three
Inverters For Fluorescent Lights; Low-Cost Sinewave Oscillator; Fast Charger For Nicad Batteries, Pt.2; How To Design
Amplifier Output Stages
April 1990: Dual Tracking ±50V Power Supply; Voice-Operated Switch (VOX) With Delayed Audio; 16-Channel Mixing
Desk, Pt.3; Active CW Filter For Weak Signal Reception; How
To Find Vintage Receivers From The 1920s.
March 1991: Remote Controller For Garage Doors, Pt.1;
Transistor Beta Tester Mk.2; A Synthesised AM Stereo
Tuner, Pt.2; Multi-Purpose I/O Board For PC-Compatibles; Universal Wideband RF Preamplifier For Amateur
Radio & TV.
June 1990: Multi-Sector Home Burglar Alarm; Low-Noise
Universal Stereo Preamplifier; Load Protection Switch For
Power Supplies; A Speed Alarm For Your Car; Fitting A Fax
Card To A Computer.
July 1990: Digital Sine/Square Generator, Pt.1 (Covers
0-500kHz); Burglar Alarm Keypad & Combination Lock;
Simple Electronic Die; Low-Cost Dual Power Supply; Inside
A Coal Burning Power Station.
April 1991: Steam Sound Simulator For Model Railroads;
Remote Controller For Garage Doors, Pt.2; Simple 12/24V
Light Chaser; Synthesised AM Stereo Tuner, Pt.3; A Practical
Approach To Amplifier Design, Pt.2.
May 1991: 13.5V 25A Power Supply For Transceivers; Stereo
Audio Expander; Fluorescent Light Simulator For Model
Railways; How To Install Multiple TV Outlets, Pt.1.
August 1990: High Stability UHF Remote Transmitter;
Universal Safety Timer For Mains Appliances (9 Minutes);
Horace The Electronic Cricket; Digital Sine/Square Wave
Generator, Pt.2.
June 1991: A Corner Reflector Antenna For UHF TV;
4-Channel Lighting Desk, Pt.1; 13.5V 25A Power Supply
For Transceivers; Active Filter For CW Reception; Tuning In
To Satellite TV, Pt.1.
September 1990: Remote Control Extender For VCRs; Power
July 1991: Battery Discharge Pacer For Electric Vehicles;
ORDER FORM
Please send me a back issue for:
❏ July 1989
❏ September 1989
❏ January 1990
❏ February 1990
❏ July 1990
❏ August 1990
❏ December 1990
❏ January 1991
❏ May 1991
❏ June 1991
❏ October 1991
❏ November 1991
❏ March 1992
❏ April 1992
❏ August 1992
❏ September 1992
❏ March 1993
❏ April 1993
❏ August 1993
❏ September 1993
❏ January 1994
❏ February 1994
❏ June 1994
❏ July 1994
❏ November 1994
❏ December 1994
❏ April 1995
❏ May 1995
❏ September 1995
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
September 1988
October 1989
March 1990
September 1990
February 1991
July 1991
December 1991
May 1992
October 1992
May 1993
October 1993
March 1994
August 1994
January 1995
June 1995
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
April 1989
November 1989
April 1990
October 1990
March 1991
August 1991
January 1992
June 1992
January 1993
June 1993
November 1993
April 1994
September 1994
February 1995
July 1995
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
May 1989
December 1989
June 1990
November 1990
April 1991
September 1991
February 1992
July 1992
February 1993
July 1993
December 1993
May 1994
October 1994
March 1995
August 1995
Enclosed is my cheque/money order for $______or please debit my: ❏ Bankcard ❏ Visa Card ❏ Master Card
Signature ____________________________ Card expiry date_____ /______
Name _______________________________ Phone No (___) ____________
PLEASE PRINT
Street ________________________________________________________
Suburb/town ________________________________ Postcode ___________
96 Silicon Chip
Note: all prices include post & packing
Australia (by return mail) ............................. $A7
NZ & PNG (airmail) ...................................... $A7
Overseas (airmail) ...................................... $A10
Detach and mail to:
Silicon Chip Publications, PO Box 139, Collaroy, NSW, Australia 2097.
Or call (02) 979 5644 & quote your credit card
details or fax the details to (02) 979 6503.
✂
Card No.
Loudspeaker Protector For Stereo Amplifiers; 4-Channel
Lighting Desk, Pt.2; How To Install Multiple TV Outlets, Pt.2;
Tuning In To Satellite TV, Pt.2.
Alarm-Triggered Security Camera; Low-Cost Audio
Mixer for Camcorders;A 24-Hour Sidereal Clock For
Astronomers.
August 1991: Build A Digital Tachometer; Masthead Amplifier
For TV & FM; PC Voice Recorder; Tuning In To Satellite TV,
Pt.3; Step-By-Step Vintage Radio Repairs.
April 1993: Solar-Powered Electric Fence; Build An Audio
Power Meter; Three-Function Home Weather Station; 12VDC
To 70VDC Step-Up Voltage Converter; Digital Clock With
Battery Back-Up.
September 1991: Studio 3-55L 3-Way Loudspeaker System;
Digital Altimeter For Gliders & Ultralights, Pt.1; The Basics
Of A/D & D/A Conversion; Windows 3 Swapfiles, Program
Groups & Icons.
October 1991: Build A Talking Voltmeter For Your PC, Pt.1;
SteamSound Simulator For Model Railways Mk.II; Magnetic Field Strength Meter; Digital Altimeter For Gliders &
Ultralights, Pt.2; Getting To Know The Windows PIF Editor.
November 1991: Colour TV Pattern Generator, Pt.1; Battery
Charger For Solar Panels; Flashing Alarm Light For Cars;
Digital Altimeter For Gliders & Ultralights, Pt.3; Build A
Talking Voltmeter For Your PC, Pt.2.
December 1991: TV Transmitter For VCRs With UHF Modulators; Infrared Light Beam Relay; Solid-State Laser Pointer;
Colour TV Pattern Generator, Pt.2; Index To Volume 4.
January 1992: 4-Channel Guitar Mixer; Adjustable 0-45V 8A
Power Supply, Pt.1; Baby Room Monitor/FM Transmitter;
Automatic Controller For Car Headlights; Experiments For
Your Games Card; Restoring An AWA Radiolette.
February 1992: Compact Digital Voice Recorder; 50-Watt/
Channel Stereo Power Amplifier; 12VDC/240VAC 40-Watt
Inverter; Adjustable 0-45V 8A Power Supply, Pt.2; Designing
A Speed Controller For Electric Models.
March 1992: TV Transmitter For VHF VCRs; Studio Twin Fifty
Stereo Amplifier, Pt.1; Thermostatic Switch For Car Radiator
Fans; Telephone Call Timer; Coping With Damaged Computer
Directories; Valve Substitution In Vintage Radios.
April 1992: IR Remote Control For Model Railroads; Differential Input Buffer For CROs; Studio Twin Fifty Stereo
Amplifier, Pt.2; Understanding Computer Memory; Aligning
Vintage Radio Receivers, Pt.1.
May 1992: Build A Telephone Intercom; Low-Cost Electronic
Doorbell; Battery Eliminator For Personal Players; Infrared
Remote Control For Model Railroads, Pt.2; Aligning Vintage
Radio Receivers, Pt.2.
June 1992: Multi-Station Headset Intercom, Pt.1; Video
Switcher For Camcorders & VCRs; Infrared Remote Control
For Model Railroads, Pt.3; 15-Watt 12-240V Inverter; A Look
At Hard Disc Drives.
July 1992: Build A Nicad Battery Discharger; 8-Station Automatic Sprinkler Timer; Portable 12V SLA Battery Charger;
Multi-Station Headset Intercom, Pt.2; Electronics Workbench
For Home Or Laboratory.
August 1992: Build An Automatic SLA Battery Charger;
Miniature 1.5V To 9V DC Converter; Dummy Load Box For
Large Audio Amplifiers; Internal Combustion Engines For
Model Aircraft; Troubleshooting Vintage Radio Receivers.
September 1992: Multi-Sector Home Burglar Alarm;
Heavy-Duty 5A Drill speed Controller (see errata Nov.
1992); General-Purpose 3½-Digit LCD Panel Meter;
Track Tester For Model Railroads; Build A Relative Field
Strength Meter.
October 1992: 2kW 24VDC To 240VAC Sinewave Inverter;
Multi-Sector Home Burglar Alarm, Pt.2; Mini Amplifier
For Personal Stereos; Electronically Regulated Lead-Acid
Battery Charger.
January 1993: Peerless PSK60/2 2-Way Hifi Loudspeakers;
Flea-Power AM Radio Transmitter; High Intensity LED Flasher
For Bicycles; 2kW 24VDC To 240VAC Sinewave Inverter, Pt.4;
Speed Controller For Electric Models, Pt.3.
February 1993: Three Simple Projects For Model Railroads;
A Low Fuel Indicator For Cars; Audio Level/VU Meter With
LED Readout; Build An Electronic Cockroach; MAL-4
Microcontroller Board, Pt.3; 2kW 24VDC To 240VAC Sine
wave Inverter, Pt.5.
March 1993: Build A Solar Charger For 12V Batteries;
May 1993: Nicad Cell Discharger; Build The Woofer Stopper;
Remote Volume Control For Hifi Systems, Pt.1; Alphanumeric LCD Demonstration Board; The Microsoft Windows
Sound System.
June 1993: Windows-Based Digital Logic Analyser, Pt.1;
Build An AM Radio Trainer, Pt.1; Remote Control For The
Woofer Stopper; Digital Voltmeter For Cars; Remote Volume
Control For Hifi Systems, Pt.2
July 1993: Build a Single Chip Message Recorder; Light
Beam Relay Extender; AM Radio Trainer, Pt.2; Windows
Based Digital Logic Analyser; Pt.2; Quiz Game Adjudicator;
Programming The Motorola 68HC705C8 Microcontroller –
Lesson 1; Antenna Tuners – Why They Are Useful.
August 1993: Low-Cost Colour Video Fader; 60-LED Brake
Light Array; A Microprocessor-Based Sidereal Clock; The
Southern Cross Z80-Based Computer; A Look At Satellites
& Their Orbits.
September 1993: Automatic Nicad Battery Charger/
Discharger; Stereo Preamplifier With IR Remote Control,
Pt.1; In-Circuit Transistor Tester; A +5V to ±15V DC Converter; Remote-Controlled Cockroach; Servicing An R/C
Transmitter, Pt.1.
October 1993: Courtesy Light Switch-Off Timer For
Cars; Wireless Microphone For Musicians; Stereo
Preamplifier With IR Remote Control, Pt.2; Electronic
Engine Management, Pt.1; Programming The Motorola
68HC705C8 Microcontroller – Lesson 2; Servicing An
R/C Transmitter, Pt.2.
November 1993: Jumbo Digital Clock; High Efficiency
Inverter For Fluorescent Tubes; Stereo Preamplifier With
IR Remote Control, Pt.3; Siren Sound Generator; Electronic
Engine Management, Pt.2; Experiments For Games Cards.
December 1993: Remote Controller For Garage Doors;
Low-Voltage LED Stroboscope; Low-Cost 25W Amplifier
Module; Build A 1-Chip Melody Generator; Electronic Engine
Management, Pt.3; Index To Volume 6.
January 1994: 3A 40V Adjustable Power Supply; Switching
Regulator For Solar Panels; Printer Status Indicator; Mini
Drill Speed Controller; Stepper Motor Controller; Active
Filter Design For Beginners; Electronic Engine Management, Pt.4.
Portable 6V SLA Battery Charger; Electronic Engine Management, Pt.10.
August 1994: High-Power Dimmer For Incandescent
Lights; Microprocessor-Controlled Morse Keyer; Dual
Diversity Tuner For FM Microphones, Pt.1; Build a Nicad
Zapper; Simple Crystal Checker; Electronic Engine Management, Pt.11.
September 1994: Automatic Discharger For Nicad Battery
Packs; MiniVox Voice Operated Relay; Image Intensified
Night Viewer; AM Radio For Aircraft Weather Beacons; Dual
Diversity Tuner For FM Microphones, Pt.2; Electronic Engine
Management, Pt.12.
October 1994: Dolby Surround Sound – How It Works;
Dual Rail Variable Power Supply (±1.25V to ±15V); Talking
Headlight Reminder; Electronic Ballast For Fluorescent Lights;
Temperature Controlled Soldering Station; Electronic Engine
Management, Pt.13.
November 1994: Dry Cell Battery Rejuvenator; A Novel
Alphanumeric Clock; 80-Metre DSB Amateur Transmitter;
Twin-Cell Nicad Discharger (See May 1993); Anti-Lock
Braking Systems; How To Plot Patterns Direct To PC
Boards.
December 1994: Dolby Pro-Logic Surround Sound Decoder,
Pt.1; Easy-To-Build Car Burglar Alarm; Three-Spot Low
Distortion Sinewave Oscillator; Clifford – A Pesky Electronic
Cricket; Cruise Control – How It Works; Remote Control
System for Models, Pt.1; Index to Vol.7.
January 1995: Build A Sun Tracker For Solar Panels;
Battery Saver For Torches; Dolby Pro-Logic Surround
Sound Decoder, Pt.2; Dual Channel UHF Remote Control;
Stereo Microphone Preamplifier; The Latest Trends In Car
Sound; Pt1.
February 1995: 50-Watt/Channel Stereo Amplifier Module;
Digital Effects Unit For Musicians; 6-Channel Thermometer
With LCD Readout; Wide Range Electrostatic Loudspeakers,
Pt.1; Oil Change Timer For Cars; The Latest Trends In Car
Sound; Pt2; Remote Control System For Models, Pt.2.
March 1995: 50W/Channel Stereo Amplifier, Pt.1; Subcarrier Decoder For FM Receivers; Wide Range Electrostatic
Loudspeakers, Pt.2; IR Illuminator For CCD Cameras &
Night Viewers; Remote Control System For Models, Pt.3;
Simple CW Filter.
April 1995: Build An FM Radio Trainer, Pt.1; Photographic
Timer For Darkrooms; Balanced Microphone Preamplifier &
Line Filter; 50W/Channel Stereo Amplifier, Pt.2; Wide Range
Electrostatic Loudspeakers, Pt.3; 8-Channel Decoder For
Radio Remote Control.
February 1994: 90-Second Message Recorder; Compact &
Efficient 12-240VAC 200W Inverter; Single Chip 0.5W Audio
Amplifier; 3A 40V Adjustable Power Supply; Electronic Engine
Management, Pt.5; Airbags – How They Work.
May 1995: Introduction To Satellite TV; CMOS Memory
Settings – What To Do When the Battery On Your Mother
board Goes Flat; Mains Music Transmitter & Receiver; Guitar
Headphone Amplifier For Practice Sessions; Build An FM
Radio Trainer, Pt.2; Low Cost Transistor & Mosfet Tester
For DMMs; 16-Channel Decoder For Radio Remote Control.
March 1994: Intelligent IR Remote Controller; Build A 50W
Audio Amplifier Module; Level Crossing Detector For Model
Railways; Voice Activated Switch For FM Microphones;
Simple LED Chaser; Electronic Engine Management, Pt.6.
June 1995: Build A Satellite TV Receiver; Train Detector For
Model Railways; A 1W Audio Amplifier Trainer; Low-Cost
Video Security System; A Multi-Channel Radio Control
Transmitter For Models, Pt.1; Build A $30 Digital Multimeter.
April 1994: Remote Control Extender For VCRs; Sound &
Lights For Model Railway Level Crossings; Discrete Dual
Supply Voltage Regulator; Low-Noise Universal Stereo
Preamplifier; Build A Digital Water Tank Gauge; Electronic
Engine Management, Pt.7.
July 1995: Low-Power Electric Fence Controller; How To Run
Two Trains On A Single Track (Plus Level Crossing Lights
& Sound Effects); Setting Up A Satellite TV Ground Station;
Build A Reliable Door Minder; Adding RAM To Your Computer;
Philips’ CDI-210 Interactive CD Player.
May 1994: Fast Charger For Nicad Batteries; Induction
Balance Metal Locator; Multi-Channel Infrared Remote
Control; Dual Electronic Dice; Two Simple Servo Driver
Circuits; Electronic Engine Management, Pt.8; Passive
Rebroadcasting For TV Signals.
August 1995: Vifa JV-60 2-Way Bass Reflex Loudspeaker
System; A Fuel Injector Monitor For Cars; Gain Controlled
Microphone Preamp; The Audio Lab PC Controlled Test
Instrument, Pt.1; The Mighty-Mite Powered Loudspeaker;
An Easy Way To Identify IDE Hard Disc Drive Parameters.
June 1994: 200W/350W Mosfet Amplifier Module; A Coolant
Level Alarm For Your Car; An 80-Metre AM/CW Transmitter
For Amateurs; Converting Phono Inputs To Line Inputs;
A PC-Based Nicad Battery Monitor; Electronic Engine
Management, Pt.9
PLEASE NOTE: November 1987 to August 1988, October
1988 to March 1989, June 1989, August 1989, May 1990,
November 1992 and December 1992 are now sold out. All
other issues are presently in stock. For readers wanting
articles from sold-out issues, we can supply photostat
copies (or tearsheets) at $7.00 per article (includes.
p&p). When supplying photostat articles or back copies,
we automatically supply any relevant notes & errata at
no extra charge.
July 1994: SmallTalk – a Tiny Voice Digitiser For The PC;
Build A 4-Bay Bow-Tie UHF Antenna; PreChamp 2-Transistor
Preamplifier; Steam Train Whistle & Diesel Horn Simulator;
September 1995 97
ASK SILICON CHIP
Got a technical problem? Can’t understand a piece of jargon or some technical principle? Drop us a line
and we’ll answer your question. Write to: Ask Silicon Chip, PO Box 139, Collaroy Beach, NSW 2097.
Controller for G-scale
electric loco
I am writing to you regarding
building a speed control for a G scale
electric train. I have a 7W solar panel
connected to a bank of ten nicad batteries from which I would like to run
the train. The whole system has to be
in DC current (input and output) and
every control I've seen is a combination of AC/DC which does not operate
satisfactorily. The control also needs
to have a forward/reverse switch. Do
you have a suitable circuit? (G. O.,
Carine, WA).
• Our most successful train controller,
a walk-around throttle design published in April & May 1988, could be
run from a supply rail of between 17
and 20V DC. Using ten nicad cells, you
would be starting with a supply rail of
12V which is not really sufficient for
this design.
If you wish to use only 12V, the most
effective design would be the simple
DC speed control published in our
February 1993 issue. Both the articles
referred to have been reprinted in our
"14 Model Railway Projects" book
which is available from us at $7.95
plus $3 for postage.
By the way, if you are using a 12V
solar panel to charge your 10 Nicad
LED temperature
gauge for a motorcycle
I need some information on
making a LED readout temperature
gauge for an Enduro motorcycle. I
have the temperature sender. Does
anyone make kits? The LEDs need
to be approx 40mm long. Also, Id
like some information on a LED
tacho 0-14000rpm firing at once
every 360 degrees (single cylinder
2-stroke) and twice very 360 degrees (twin cylinder 2-stroke). (P.
S., Parap, NT).
• A suitable circuit for a temperature gauge LED readout was
98 Silicon Chip
batteries, it is unlikely that they will
ever be fully charged and hence their
effective service life is likely to be
very short.
To properly charge a 10-cell Nicad
battery pack, you need a charging
voltage of more than 18V. We plan
to publish a fast charger for Nicads,
running from a 12V car battery, in the
coming October 1995 issue.
Reducing current drain
of Door Minder
Your Door-Minder project in the July
edition is a very novel idea. However,
I estimate the current draw of this circuit to be around 8 to 10mA and not
really suitable for batteries. Besides,
why do you use hard to get (expensive)
IGFET transistors (BS 170)? Can they
be substituted by enhancement-mode
Mosfets (25K679N) or perhaps J-FETs
(MPF-102) etc?
Is it feasible to make the following
modifications to lower consumption:
(1) deletion of the 7808 regulator; (2)
use of a 5V reference diode for the
bias-voltages for IC1; (3) switching off
the power rail to IC3 when not used
via transistor. Could it be modified to
work with sliding-doors and how? (M.
S., Edgewater, WA).
• Your estimate of current drain is
published in the February 1994
issue of Silicon Chip on page 45.
It was for reading the output from
an oxygen sensor but a temperature
sensor could also be used if a 4.7kW
resistor is connected between the
12V supply and input at pin 5.
A LED Digital Tachometer was
published in the August 1991 issue of Silicon Chip. For the single
cylinder two stroke, use 180kW for
Rx while the twin two stroke will
require 82kW for Rx. Calibration
using the 50Hz signal for the single
cylinder engine is for a reading of
3000 RPM; for the twin, use 1500
RPM.
about right and is really too much for
a battery operated device. That is why
we specified a 12V plugpack.
While you could modify the circuit along the lines you suggest, the
greatest economy would be obtained
by substituting a TL062 for the TL072
and shutting down the LM386 when
no signal is present. However, the latter modification would require more
circuitry.
Charger for
deep cycle batteries
I have a question regarding deep
cycle batteries. I have an 85 amphour deep cycle battery that is used
to power an electric outboard motor.
How should these type of batteries be
charged, and how can I tell when it's
fully charged? Can I use the SLA battery charger published in the August
1992 issue? If so, where can I obtain a
kit of parts? (C. W., Middle Park, Qld).
• Your deep cycle battery could be
charged with the SLA battery charger
although at its maximum setting it
would take many hours to charge a
flat 85 amp-hour battery. As far as we
know, kits for this project are no longer
available but you can purchase the PC
board from RCS Radio Pty Ltd, phone
(02) 587 3491.
We hope to publish a higher capacity charger for conventional lead acid
batteries, sometime in the next three
or four months.
Fun with the weather
beacon radio
I recently bought a Dick Smith kit
to make your LF weather beacon AM
radio, as featured in the September
1994 issue.
Wiring the components once assembled into the case was a bit fiddly,
especially wiring the leads to the RF
and Volume pots. However, it all came
together in the end, including my own
modification of a headphone socket
that mutes the speaker when using
headphones.
The radio worked first try but at first
I was disappointed in its performance.
However, it is 50 years since I last
used a TRF set, and now I have got the
"feel" of it, I have had quite surprising
results. My best reception so far is
"WON", the Non-Directional Beacon at
Wonthaggi, just over 110km away on
the coast just south-east of Port Phillip
Bay. I also receive Melbourne Radio
Coastal Shipping station at excellent
strength, on 500 and 430kHz, located
90km away.
The only problem I have is a continual background of programmes
from the two ABC stations on 621 and
774kHz, regardless of the setting of the
tuning control.
The stations are 18 to 20km away.
I can minimise the babble by rotating
the radio so that the ferrite rod is
"end-on" to the stations but the background babble is still there. Despite
this, I can receive eight NDBs which
is good going for a TRF set with no
external antenna. I did try coupling
a long wire antenna to the set but the
BC breakthrough rendered it useless.
I would be interested to know if the
original set, used in Penrith, suffered
from broadcast band breakthrough,
or am I just unlucky in being close to
the Melbourne stations? (J. S., Glenroy, Vic).
• You should not suffer from broadcast station breakthrough as you have
found. One point to watch is to keep
the wires from the ferrite rod to the PC
board as short as possible and together.
This will minimise direct pickup on
the antenna wires. The ferrite rod must
also not be too close to the PC board
or to any surrounding metalwork.
You may be able to improve the performance of your set by using a larger
ferrite antenna.
Source for
solid state vibrators
In the August 1995 issue, a reader
asked about obtaining vibrators or
the use of a solid state replacement.
Replacement vibrators are obtainable
through the many vintage radio restorers in NSW and Victoria, such as
"Resurrection Radio" of 242 Chapel
Street, Prahran, Victoria 3151, phone
(03) 9510 4486, and come in a variety
of voltages and, in their latest parts list
were listed at $35.
At that price the solid state device
looks very attractive, unless you are
a stickler for authenticity, but maybe
Command control for
model railways
Over the years, I have followed
with interest the various model
railroad projects you have published. I have purchased a copy of
"14 Model Railway Projects" and
found it useful.
Have you considered some projects based on the Digital Command
Control system being adopted by
the NMRA in the US? Public domain plans are available for standalone and computer controlled
systems. I am very interested in
moving to this form of control but
lack the expertise to transform the
basic circuits into an operating
design, although I am capable of
building the kits from the resulting
plans.
I don't know how much interest
someone will find a way to fit the
device into the case of an old vibrator
to maintain the look of originality. (B.
W., Caulfield North, Vic).
Diagram for Audiosonic
cassette recorder
Do you, or any of your readers,
know where I might be able to obtain the schematic diagram for the
Audiosonic AM/FM stereo radio
dual cassette recorder, which has
item code 715 790, and art number
WKC9558E? The stereo is virtually all
black in colour, and would be about
5-7 years old.
Does anybody know where I can
get the book entitled Microprocessor
Data Handbook 3rd Edition, which
is published by Micro Tech? Jaycar
Electronics did sell this item but have
since run out. (P. Fullagar, 6 Highfield
St, Mayfield, NSW 2304).
Digital display
for AM/FM radio
I have bough a GE Superadio which
is supposed to be very good at receiving medium wave broadcasts. It
has medium wave and FM reception.
Unfortunately, it is an analog model.
It has no VU meter or anything else.
I want to have a VU meter and digital
readout installed in it, either LED or
LCD. As there does not seem to be any
there would be in such projects but
I am convinced it is a very practical
system, particularly for new layouts. I would also like to see some
notes on how your previous projects, such as the train detector in
the June 1995 issue, would operate
with a command control system.
(G. S., Esperance, WA).
• We are aware of these developments but are concerned that
the receivers to be installed in
locos would require surface mount
components which would be a big
obstacle for most model railway
enthusiasts. The overall cost could
be a problem too, apart from the
considerable development cost
for such a project.The detector
published in the June 1995 issue
should work with command control systems, without any modifications.
room on the radio for such additions, I
suppose that it will have to be installed
in a "zippy" box with wiring leading
to the radio.
Is such a project possible? (J. G.,
Runaway Bay, Qld).
• Quite a lot of circuitry is required to
add a digital readout to any conventional radio, particularly if it covers the
AM broadcast and FM bands. In both
cases the circuitry must measure the
local oscillator in the radio and then
subtract the intermediate frequency to
find the station frequency.
We have not published a suitable
circuit and would hazard a guess that
if we did, the resulting kit could easily
cost $150 or more. Nor is there any
guarantee that your radio would have
internal access to the local oscillators
- they may be buried inside a large
integrated circuit and thus the job may
not be feasible at all.
LCD capacitance
meter jitter
I have put together a capacitance
meter as described in the January
1991 issue. All ranges operate correctly except for the pF range. Here
I experience an instability of the last
digit. It remains steady for two or three
updates and then it changes.
The difference can be as high as 8pF.
I am convinced that the synchronous
coupling between the free running IC1
September 1995 99
Headphone amplifier
for PA system
After reviewing your recent articles on the 50W Stereo Amplifier
(Feb-Apr 1995) and looking at my
version of the 120W PA Amplifier
(Nov. 1988 to Jan. 1989), which
has four microphone inputs and a
line output for a tape recorder or
power amplifier, I would like to add
a headphone amplifier.
This would function in the same
way as it does in your 50W Stereo
Amplifier, having normally the
audio signal feeding the output
socket for the line output, but
when the headphone jack (mono)
is inserted, the signal is diverted to
the headphone amplifier.
Can the circuitry used in the 50W
Stereo Amplifier for the headphone
and the bistable IC2 is at fault.
There may have been others who
have experienced the same trouble
and have been able to rectify the malfunction.
I would also like to ask for a concise
explanation, maybe from one of your
readers, on how do the "LCD A/D
converters-display drivers" activate
the correct segments when they are
bundled up in groups, ie agd, bc and
ef respectively. (K. B., Forestville,
NSW).
• Jitter in the last digit of the display
could be attributed to the changes in
amplifier be used for this project?
What alterations will have to be
done? And lastly, what are the
power supply requirements for the
headphone amplifier?
Please note the headphone amplifier will only need to be mono,
not stereo. (R. T., Mundubbera,
Qld).
• The headphone amplifier to the
50W Stereo Amplifier should work
without problems. If you need to
increase the gain you can do so by
reducing the 10kW resistor connected to pin 6 (2) of IC3a.
The required supply voltage is
±15V DC. This can be derived in
the same way as the existing low
voltage supply rails in the 120W
PA amplifier; ie, via 680W 5W dropping resistors and 15V 3-terminal
regulators.
output levels of IC1 and IC2 occurring
at different times. These can affect the
power supply rails which can slightly
alter the timing sequence and thus the
capacitance reading.
The PC board design should be
carefully checked for correct ground
track layout so that current loops are
not formed. The board pattern for the
original design using LED displays
can be seen in the May 1990 issue,
where star point earthing was used.
This design did not have problems
with jitter on the pF range.
Each segment of an LCD is driven
SILICON CHIP FLOPPY INDEX
WITH FILE VIEWER
Now available: the complete index to all SILICON CHIP articles
since the first issue in November 1987. The Floppy Index comes
with a handy file viewer that lets you look at the index line by
line or page by page for quick browsing, or you can use the search function.
All commands are listed on the screen, so you’ll always know what to do next.
Notes & Errata also now available: this file lets you quickly check out the
Notes & Errata (if any) for all articles published in SILICON CHIP. Not an index
but a complete copy of all Notes & Errata text (diagrams not included). The file
viewer is included in the price, so that you can quickly locate the item of interest.
The Floppy Index and Notes & Errata files are supplied in ASCII format on a
3.5-inch or 5.25-inch floppy disc to suit PC-compatible computers. Note: the File
Viewer requires MSDOS 3.3 or above.
Price $7.00 each + $3 p&p. Send your order to: Silicon Chip Publications, PO Box
139, Collaroy 2097; or phone (02) 9979 5644 & quote your credit card number;
or fax the details to (02) 9979 6503. Please specify 3.5-inch or 5.25-inch disc.
100 Silicon Chip
entirely separately. They are not
bundled together as in a multiplexed
display. A "lit" or visible segment
occurs when the signal applied to
it is 180 degrees out of phase to the
backplane. When the applied signal
is in phase with the backplane, the
segment is off.
How to design an
electromagnet
Could you please give me a simple
formula to calculate the ampere-turns
necessary for a home-made electromagnet or solenoid for various battery-operated gadgets?
For example, I wish to make an
electromagnet or solenoid to operate a
camera which requires 250 gram pressure on the trigger to operate. Hope this
is in your field. (D. H., Mosman, NSW).
• Unfortunately. we cannot help you
directly since the design involves
not just the ampere-turns produced
by the coil, but also the details of the
magnetic circuit as well. This involves
the type of steel and design of the
laminations, the design of the plunger
and its return spring, if required. The
driving circuit must also be taken into
account because many solenoids are
designed to be energised momentarily;
if energised continuously they will
quickly overheat and burn out.
Your camera solenoid application is
one requiring considerable power and
would also need to be a momentary
design otherwise it would be physically quite large.
Having noted all of the above, why
not try winding several hundred turns
of fine gauge wire onto a bobbin which
is a close fit over a 1/4-inch bol? Energised with a 6V lantern battery, this
should provide quite a reasonable
degree of thrust. At the very least it
will provide a starting point.
Notes & Errata
Fuel Injector Monitor, August 1995:
the specified LM358 op amp has been
found to be non-linear in the circuit
at low and high injector duty cycles.
The problem is corrected by substituting an RCA CA 3260E op amp which
has CMOS outputs. This op amp is a
drop-in replacement but a change to
the integration RC network at pin 3 is
desirable. Change the 4.7kW resistor
to 47kW and the 220µF capacitor to
10µF.
SC
SILICON CHIP
BOOK SHOP
Newnes Guide
to Satellite TV
336 pages, in paperback at $49.95.
Installation, Reception & Repair.
By Derek J. Stephenson. First
published 1991, reprinted 1994
(3rd edition).
This is a practical guide on the
installation and servicing of
satellite television equipment. The
coverage of the subject is extensive, without excessive theory or
mathematics. 371 pages, in hard
cover at $55.95.
Servicing Personal
Computers
By Michael Tooley. First pub
lished 1985. 4th edition 1994.
Computers are prone to failure
from a number of common causes
& some that are not so common.
This book sets out the principles
& practice of computer servicing
(including disc drives, printers &
monitors), describes some of the
latest software diagnostic routines
& includes program listings. 387
pages in hard cover at $59.95.
The Art of Linear
Electronics
By John Linsley Hood. Published
1993.
This is a practical handbook from
one of the world’s most prolific
audio designers, with many of his
designs having been published in
English technical magazines over
the years. A great many practical
circuits are featured – a must for
anyone interested in audio design.
Optoelectronics:
An Introduction
By J. C. A. Chaimowicz. First
published 1989, reprinted 1992.
This particular field is about to
explode and it is most important
for engineers and technicians to
bring themselves up to date. The
subject is comprehensively covered, starting with optics and then
moving into all aspects of fibre
optic communications. 361 pages,
in paperback at $55.95.
Digital Audio & Compact
Disc Technology
Produced by the Sony Service
Centre (Europe). 3rd edition,
published 1995.
Prepared by Sony’s technical
staff, this is the best book on
compact disc technology that we
have ever come across. It covers
digital audio in depth, including
PCM adapters, the Video8 PCM
format and R-DAT. If you want to
understand digital audio, you need
this reference book. 305 pages, in
paperback at $55.95.
Power Electronics
Handbook
Components, Circuits & Applica
tions, by F. F. Mazda. Published
1990.
Previously a neglected field, power
electronics has come into its own,
particularly in the areas of traction
and electric vehicles. F. F. Mazda
is an acknowledged authority on
the subject and he writes mainly
on the many uses of thyristors &
Triacs in single and three phase
circuits. 417 pages, in soft cover
at $59.95.
Surface Mount Technology
By Rudolph Strauss. First pub
lish-ed 1994.
This book will provide informative
reading for anyone considering
the assembly of PC boards with
surface mounted devices. Includes
chapters on wave soldering, reflow
soldering, component placement,
cleaning & quality control. 361
pages, in hard cover at $99.00.
Electronics Engineer’s
Reference Book
Edited by F. F. Mazda. First pub
lished 1989. 6th edition 1994.
This just has to be the best reference book available for electronics
engineers. Provides expert coverage of all aspects of electronics
in five parts: techniques, physical
phenomena, material & components, electronic design, and
applications. The sixth edition has
been expanded to include chapters
on surface mount technology,
hardware & software design,
Your Name__________________________________________________
PLEASE PRINT
Address____________________________________________________
_____________________________________Postcode_____________
Daytime Phone No.______________________Total Price $A _________
❏ Cheque/Money Order
❏ Bankcard ❏ Visa Card ❏ MasterCard
Card No.
Signature_________________________ Card expiry date_____/______
Return to: Silicon Chip Publications, PO Box 139, Collaroy NSW, Australia 2097.
Or call (02) 9979 5644 & quote your credit card details; or fax to (02) 9979 6503.
semicustom electronics & data
communications. 63 chapters, in
paperback at $140.00.
Radio Frequency
Transistors
Principles & Practical Appli
cations. By Norm Dye & Helge
Granberg. Published 1993.
This timely book strips away the
mysteries of RF circuit design.
Written by two Motorola engineers, it looks at RF transistor
fundamentals before moving on
to specific design examples; eg,
amplifiers, oscillators and pulsed
power systems. Also included are
chapters on filtering techniques,
impedance matching & CAD. 235
pages, in hard cover at $85.00.
Newnes Guide to TV &
Video Technology
By Eugene Trundle. First pub
lish-ed 1988, reprinted 1990,
1992.
Eugene Trundle has written for
many years in Television magazine
and his latest book is right up date
on TV and video technology. 432
pages, in paperback, at $39.95.
Title
Price
Newnes Guide to Satellite TV
Servicing Personal Computers
The Art Of Linear Electronics
Optoelectronics: An Introduction
Digital Audio & Compact Disc Technology
Power Electronics Handbook
Surface Mount Technology
Electronic Engineer's Reference Book
Radio Frequency Transistors
Newnes Guide to TV & Video Technology
$55.95
$59.95
$49.95
$55.95
$55.95
$59.95
$99.00
$140.00
$85.00
$39.95
Postage: add $5.00 per book. Orders over $100 are post
free within Australia. NZ & PNG add $10.00 per book,
elsewhere add $15 per book.
TOTAL $A
September 1995 101
MARKET CENTRE
Cash in your surplus gear. Advertise it here in Silicon Chip.
CLASSIFIED ADVERTISING RATES
FOR SALE
Advertising rates for this page: Classified ads: $10.00 for up to 12 words plus 50
cents for each additional word. Display ads (casual rate): $25 per column centimetre (Max. 10cm). Closing date: five weeks prior to month of sale.
To run your classified ad, print it clearly in the space below or on a separate
sheet of paper, fill out the form & send it with your cheque or credit card details
to: Silicon Chip Classifieds, PO Box 139, Collaroy, NSW 2097. Or fax the details
to (02) 979 6503.
INVERTERS 12V-230VAC 90% EFFICIENCY. Modified Sine Wave. Compact
55 x 160 x 98mm. Light 800gm. Standby
50mA/0.6W. 100 Watt Continuous $99.
200 Watt $149. A.S.S. (09) 349 9413,
fax (09) 344 5905.
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
INFRA-RED CORDLESS RECHARG
EABLE STEREO HEADPHONES.
20Hz-20kHz. Lightweight. $69. A.S.S.
(09) 349 9413, fax (09) 344 5905.
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
_____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________
MicroZed have in stock NewMicro
68HC11 board, resident FORTH, with
alternative BASIC, Small C, and Assembler, supplied.
TINY 2/3 MATCHBOX SIZE VIDEO
CAMERA MODULES $169. RF MODULATOR $30. Patch these into your TV
Antenna System Display and/or Record
on all TVs & VCRs. VERY FLEXIBLE &
PRACTICAL VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
PACKAGE only $199. Camera 400+
TVL, 35 x 35 x 25mm incl Lens, Auto
Iris, Infra-Red & Low Light Sensitive. IR
LEDs 50mW pkt/30 $15 SEE IN TOTAL
DARKNESS. A.S.S. (09) 349 9413, fax
(09) 344 5905.
ADD AN IBM KEYBOARD DECODER
(EA, Dec. 90) to your project. 8 left.
PCB, Programmed 8749 & Disk $20.
15 Romloader 256K upgrade PCBs
left. PCB, EPROM, 9346 EEPROM,
74HC4053, Labels & Disk $25. P&P $5.
Enclosed is my cheque/money order for $__________ or please debit my
RCS RADIO PTY LTD
Card No.
✂
❏ Bankcard ❏ Visa Card ❏ Master Card
Signature__________________________ Card expiry date______/______
Name ______________________________________________________
Street ______________________________________________________
Suburb/town ___________________________ Postcode______________
102 Silicon Chip
RCS Radio Pty Ltd is the only company that manufactures and sells every
PC board and front panel published
in SILICON CHIP, ETI and EA.
RCS Radio Pty Ltd,
651 Forest Rd, Bexley 2207.
Phone (02) 587 3491
Tantau Australia, PO Box 1232, Lane
Cove 2066. AH (02) 878 4715.
D.I.Y. PACKAGED CCTV SYSTEMS.
$699. 10" Monitor 4 Ch Switcher, Camera, 20M Cable & Stand PLUG-IN & GO!
Features Two-Way Intercom, Alarm I/Ps,
VCR I/O, 400 TVL 0.2 Lux Low Light &
IR Sensitive Camera. A.S.S. (09) 349
9413, fax (09) 344 5905.
CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT. Mono & Colour Cameras incl.
Lens from $249. 32 x 32 x 15mm
CONCEALED PINHOLE Modules from
$239. 4 & 8 Ch Quad & Freeze Screen
Splitters & Switchers from $239. Combination Modulator/Antenna Boosters to
Display/Record Video on TV/VCR. Video
Microscopes 10X to 1000X. Discounts
10% - 37.5%. A.S.S. (09) 349 9413, fax
(09) 344 5905.
68HC705 Development System: Editor, assembler, In Circuit Simulator and
Programmer board. Oztechnics, PO Box
38, Illawong, NSW 2234. Phone (02)
541 0310. Fax (02) 541 0734. email:OZTEC<at>OZEMAIL.COM.AU.
MicroZed have PIC Source book gives
code for Stamp routines to use in your
own PIC programs. $70 plus $8 courier
delivery.
SWAPMEET: Glenroy 22 Oct. Sites
25/26. Vintage, amateur components,
valves. Catalogue SAE T. Mitchell, 68
Rowan Street, Bendigo 3550.
486 DX4 100MHz AMD CPU on a VLB
motherboard with 256 cache. $475 plus
5% S/H. Prices are in Canadian dollars. Other items are available. Please
write for details. Send Money Orders to
Renato Zannese, 615 Roding Street,
Downsview, Ontario, Canada M3M 2A6.
ftp://rasi.lr.ttu.ee/pub/sis/prod/microchip/3rd-Party/Don.McKenz ie/
is the Internet address for my promo
disk, or send a $2 coin. PIC84PGM
$20, PIC16C84 (EEPROM) $15, Basic
Stamps $65, lots more. Don McKenzie,
29 Ellesmere Crescent, Tullamarine
3043. Ph (03) 9338 6286, 019 93 9799.
FULLY APPROVED 12V DC 1 AMP
“PLUGPACKS”. Buy direct from import
er. $10 + sales tax. Many other models
available. Call Av-Comm Pty Ltd (02)
9949 7414/9948 2667 or fax (02) 9949
7095.
MEMORY & DRIVES
EX. TAX PRICES AT JULY, 1995
SIMM (all 70ns)
Parity/No Parity
1Mb 30-pin
$64/58
4Mb 30-pin $250/215
2Mb 72-pin $151/135
4Mb 72-pin $250/232
8Mb 72-pin
$515/452
16Mb 72-pin
$850/765
32Mb 72-pin $1530/1700
MAC
8Mb P’BOOK
CO-PROCESSORS
387S/DX to 40
$450
$90
LASER PRINTER HP
with 2Mb
$200
COMPAQ
CONTURA
8Mb
$544
Parallax Basic Stamp
DRAM DIP
1Mb x 1
70ns DIP $9.00
256 x 4
70ns DIP $8.10
256 x 16
70ns DIP $55.00
IBM PS.2
THINKPAD
L40/N33
8Mb
4Mb
$590
$300
TOSHIBA
3100SX
2100/50
4Mb
8Mb
$275
$590
SUN
SPARC ELC 16Mb
SPARC 10/20 64Mb
$850
$3872
DRIVES – SEAGATE
545Mb 14ms 3yr wty $280
850Mb 11ms 3yr wty $355
1052Mb 9ms 5yr wty $535
Sales tax 21%. Overnight delivery. Credit cards welcome.
Ring for latest prices. We buy & trade RAM.
PELHAM
Tel: (02) 980 6988
Fax: (02) 980 6991
Shop 6, 2 Hillcrest Rd, Pennant Hills, 2120.
AUSTRALIAN AUDIO CONSULTANTS
HAVE RELOCATED
TO NEWLY DESIGNED PREMISES
We can supply all your driver needs,
direct from the manufacturer.
Dynaudio, Vifa, Scanspeak, Morel, etc.
Full Consulting Service available.
We specialise in creating custom designs
for the hobbyist or manufacturer.
Home Theatre Specialists.
For further details contact:
Australian Audio Consultants,
PO Box 11, Stockport, SA 5410.
Phone or fax (085) 28 2201.
MicroZed have Electric Piston, MUSCLE wires, project books and kits.
Electric motorless motion.
AIRBAND HAND-HELD TRANSCEIVER, AIR-960. Fully DOTC approved.
118-136MHz, thumbwheel frequency
control. C/W, 12V 500mA NICAD pack,
trickle charger, carry case, antenna, belt
clip. 1 year warranty. Buy direct from
importer, $520 + tax if applicable. Call
Av-Comm Pty Ltd (02) 9949 7417/9948
2667 or fax (02) 9949 7095.
PROTEL EASYTRAX Ver 2.04 PCB
CAD software. $195. Phone 018 133
620 bh.
LOGIC ANALYSER HP1651B 32-channel including pods and manuals. $3500
ono (02) 858 4790.
MicroZed have large range accessories for Stamp and PIC applications.
BS1-IC
Resident BASIC interpreter, 8 I/O,
Minimum extra hardware needed
for most jobs. Send 4 x 45c postage
stamps for information package
and prices for all products.
MicroZed Computers
PO Box 634 (296 Cook’s Rd), ARMIDALE 2350
V (067) 722 777 F (067) 728 987
Credit cards accepted.
FBASIC TICkit Has 21 I/O
From VersaTech PIC16C57 <at>
20MHz, on a 65mm square board,
has on-board interpreter, 16 GP
I/O, plus 5 I/O for IRQ, IRQ ack
RTC/Counter 12C buss, handles
SRAM and LCD too! Stores program in 8K EEPROM.
Send 4 x 45c postage stamps for
information.
MicroZed Computers
PO Box 634 (296 Cook’s Rd), ARMIDALE 2350
V (067) 722 777 F (067) 728 987
Credit cards accepted.
Latest available is DS1620 temp
measuring kit.
LASERS: argon 30-100mW air-cooled,
single line blue/green and 240 volt power
supply. 100mW pumped diode green
532nm laser head size 75 x 50 x 35mm.
LASER DYNAMICS (03) 9532 1981, fax
(03) 9555 7449.
COMPLETE WORKSHOP PROGRAM: suit IBM compatible 386 or better computer. Handles: Stock Control,
Customer Records, Debits, Credits,
Faults, Manuals and Phone Directory.
For demo disk, ring Jack Albers Electronics & Software Development on
(045) 71 1640.
CHEAP HEATSHRINK TUBING: Australian made, red, black, blue, white,
clear, 2.4mm/$1.10pm, 3.2/$1.30,
4.8/$1.70, 6.4/$2.10, 9.5/$2.30,
12.7/$2.70, 19/$3.70, 25.4/$5.10. P&P
September 1995 103
Microprocessor For
Digital Effects Unit
Microprocessor For
Stereo Preamplifier
Advertising Index
Now available: the 68HC705-C8P
pre-programmed microprocessor IC
for the Digital Effects Unit described
in the February 1995 issue.
Price: $45 + $6 p+p
Payment by cheque, money order or
credit card to: Silicon Chip Publica
tions, PO Box 139, Collaroy, NSW
2097. Phone (02) 9979 5644; Fax (02)
9979 6503.
Available now: the 68HC705-C8P
pre-programmed microprocessor for
the Remote Controlled Stereo Preamplifier (Sept.-Oct. 1993).
Price: $45 + $6 p+p
Payment by cheque, money order
or credit card to: Silicon Chip Pub
lications, PO Box 139, Collaroy, NSW
2097. Phone (02) 9979 5644; Fax (02)
9979 6503.
Altronics ........................... 64-66,83
C COMPILERS: everything you need
to develop C and ASM software for
68HC08, 6809, 68HC11, 68HC16,
8051/52, 8080/85, 8086 or 8096:
$150.00 each. Macro Cross Assemblers
for these CPUs + 6800/01/03/05 and
6502: $150 for the set. Debug monitors:
$75 for 6 CPUs. All compilers, XASMs
and monitors: $450. 8051/52 or 80C320
simulator (fast): $75. Demo disk: FREE.
All prices + $5 postage. GRANTRONICS
PTY LTD, PO Box 275, Wentworthville
2145. Ph/Fax (02) 631 1236.
NEW SPRINKLER CONTROLLER
KITS: RAIN BRAIN version uses ‘C8
104 Silicon Chip
Avico Electronics.........................93
Car Projects Book......................IFC
Dick Smith Electronics........... 12-15
Harbuch Electronics....................92
Instant PCBs..............................104
$3.00 up to 10 metres. Free data sheet.
DOMCOR DISTRIBUTORS, 67 King
Road, Beechboro, WA 6063.
MICROCRAFT PRESENTS: Dunfield
(DDS) products are now available in
Australia. Micro C, the affordable “C”
compiler for embedded applications.
Versions for 8051/52, 8086, 8096,
68HC08, 6809, 68HC11 or 68HC16
$149.95 each + $3 p&h • Now on special is the SDK, a package of ALL the
DDS “C” compilers for $410 + $6 p&h
(save $139) • EMILY52 is a PC based
8051/52 high speed simulator $69.95 +
$3 p&h •DDS demo disks $7 + $3 p&h
• VHS VIDEO from the USA (PAL)
“CNC X-Y-Z using car alternators” (uses
alternators as cheap power stepper
motors!) $49.95 + $6 p&h (includes
diagrams) • Device programming
EPROMs/PALs etc from $1.50 (inc
label). We use and recommend the
HILO ALL-07 Universal Programmer
• Fixed price PCB layout & photoplots.
We use and recommend PROTEL For
Windows EDA tools • Credit cards
accepted • Call Bob for more details.
MICROCRAFT, PO Box 514, Concord,
NSW 2137. Phone (02) 744 5440 or Fax
(02) 744 9280.
Av-Comm................................21,73
Jaycar ................................... 49-56
Kits-R-US.....................................95
L & M Satellite Supplies...............63
and switch mode supply. Features galore!! Contact Mantis Micro Products,
38 Garnet St, Niddrie 3042. Phone/fax
(03) 337 1917.
PROGRAMMER/EDITOR SOFTWARE
for new Lattice EEPROM 7ns Generic
Digital Switch ICs. Just connect to PC
parallel port! Use to reconfigure circuits
without rewiring! Send SSAE, phone or
poll fax. Advanced R & D Solutions, 12
Copeland Road, Lethbridge Park 2770.
Ph/Fax (02) 628 1223.
Macservice...............................3,26
MicroZed Computers.................103
Oatley Electronics.................. 90-91
Pelham......................................103
Railway Projects Book.............OBC
RCS Radio ................................102
Resurrection Radio......................85
SATELLITE DISHES: international reception of Intelsat, Panamsat, Gorizont,
Rimsat. Warehouse Sale – 4.6m Dish
& Pole $1499; LNB $50; Feed $75. All
accessories available. Videosat, 2/28
Salisbury Rd, Hornsby. Phone (02) 482
3100 8.30-5.00 M-F.
Rod Irving Electronics .......... 27-31
UNUSUAL BOOKS: Electronic Devices, Fireworks, Locksmithing, Radar
Invisibility, Surveillance, Self-Protection,
Unusual Chem
istry and more. For a
complete catalog, send 95 cents in
stamps to Vector Press, Dept S, PO Box
434, Brighton, SA 5048.
Silicon Chip Software..................89
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT: we sell
quality products at prices you can afford. Dishes from $140. Ku LNB voltage
switching with built-in feedhorn from
$150. C band LNB 23 deg from $140.
Receivers; eg, Pace 919 low threshold
is $420. We stock Gardiner, Drake,
Pace, Chaparrel, KTI, plus many more.
A catalogue is available. Contact Satellite Professionals on phone or fax (03)
803 0215.
R.S.K. Electronics........................94
Silicon Chip Back Issues....... 96-97
Silicon Chip Bookshop...............101
Silicon Chip Walchart................IBC
_________________________________
PC Boards
Printed circuit boards for SILICON
CHIP projects are made by:
• RCS Radio Pty Ltd, 651 Forest
Rd, Bexley, NSW 2207. Phone (02)
587 3491.
• Marday Services, PO Box 19-189,
Avondale, Auckland, NZ. Phone (09)
828 5730.
• HT Electronics, Shop 4, 8 Roberts
Rd, Hackham West, SA 5163. Phone
(08) 326 5567.
|